ML22240A037: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(StriderTol Bot insert)
 
(StriderTol Bot change)
Line 16: Line 16:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Advanced Passive 1000 (AP1000)
{{#Wiki_filter:GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Advanced Passive 1000 (AP1000)
Generic Technical Specification Traveler (GTST)
Generic Technical Specification Traveler (GTST)


==Title:==
==Title:==
Changes Related to LCO 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation I. Technical Specifications Task Force (TSTF) Travelers, Approved Since Revision 2 of STS NUREG-1431, and Used to Develop this GTST TSTF Number and
Changes Related to LCO 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
 
I. Technical Specifications Task Force (TSTF) Travelers, Approved Since Revision 2 of STS NUREG-1431, and Used to Develop this GTST
 
TSTF Number and


==Title:==
==Title:==
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3, Relocate Surveillance Frequencies to Licensee Control - RITSTF Initiative 5b TSTF-469-T, Rev 0, Correct Action to Suspend Positive Reactivity Additions TSTF-519-T, Rev 0, Increase Standardization in Condition and Required Action Notes STS NUREGs Affected:
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3, Relocate Surveillance Frequencies to Licensee Control - RITSTF Initiative 5b TSTF-469-T, Rev 0, Correct Action to Suspend Positive Reactivity Additions TSTF-519-T, Rev 0, Increase Standardization in Condition and Required Action Notes
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: NUREGs 1430, 1431, 1432, 1433, and 1434 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1431 and 1432 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1430 and 1431 NRC Approval Date:
 
STS NUREGs Affected:
 
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: NUREGs 1430, 1431, 1432, 1433, and 1434 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1431 and 1432 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1430 and 1431
 
NRC Approval Date:
 
TSTF-425-A, Rev. 3: 06-Jul-09 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: 22-Apr-04 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: 16-Oct-09 (TSTF Review)
TSTF-425-A, Rev. 3: 06-Jul-09 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: 22-Apr-04 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: 16-Oct-09 (TSTF Review)
TSTF Classification:
TSTF Classification:
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: Technical Change TSTF-469-T, Rev 1: Editorial Change TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG Only Change Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                Page 1


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 II. Reference Combined License (RCOL) Standard Departures (Std. Dep.), RCOL COL Items, and RCOL Plant-Specific Technical Specifications (PTS) Changes Used to Develop this GTST RCOL Std. Dep. Number and
TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: Technical Change TSTF-469-T, Rev 1: Editorial Change TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG Only Change
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 1 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
II. Reference Combined License (RCOL) Standard Departures (Std. Dep.), RCOL COL Items, and RCOL Plant -Specific Technical Specifications (PTS) Changes Used to Develop this GTST
 
RCOL Std. Dep. Number and


==Title:==
==Title:==
There are no Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (Vogtle or VEGP) departures applicable to GTS 3.3.1.
There are no Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (Vogtle or VEGP) departures applicable to GTS 3.3.1.
RCOL COL Item Number and
RCOL COL Item Number and


==Title:==
==Title:==
There are no Vogtle COL items applicable to GTS 3.3.1.
There are no Vogtle COL items applicable to GTS 3.3.1.
RCOL PTS Change Number and
RCOL PTS Change Number and


==Title:==
==Title:==
The VEGP License Amendment Request (LAR) proposed the following changes to the initial version of the PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP LAR). These changes include Administrative Changes (A), Detail Removed Changes (D), Less Restrictive Changes (L), and More Restrictive Changes (M). These changes are discussed in Sections VI and VII of this GTST.
The VEGP License Amendment Request (LAR) proposed the following changes to the initial version of the PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP LAR). These changes include Administrative Changes (A), Detail Removed Changes (D), Less Restrictive Changes (L), and More Restrictive Changes (M). These changes are discussed in Sections VI and VII of this GTST.
VEGP LAR DOC A024:        Reformat of GTS 3.3.1 into Seven Parts; 3.3.1 through 3.3.7; note that this maps GTS 3.3.1 requirements into interim A024-modified TS (MTS) Subsection 3.3.2, to which the other changes are applied.
VEGP LAR DOC A026:        SR Note Change VEGP LAR DOC M01:        Deletion of Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) Definition VEGP LAR DOC M02:        Provision for Two or More Inoperable Divisions or Channels VEGP LAR DOC L07:        Certain TS Required Actions Requiring the Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) to be Opened Are Revised into Two Required Actions VEGP LAR DOC L09:        Revise Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 and related Conditions VEGP LAR DOC L10:        Delete PTS 3.3.1 Function 16, Interlocks VEGP LAR DOC L11:        Delete Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 third row and associated references Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                    Page 2


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 III. Comments on Relations Among TSTFs, RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Items, and RCOL PTS Changes This section discusses the considered changes that are: (1) applicable to operating reactor designs, but not to the AP1000 design; (2) already incorporated in the GTS; or (3) superseded by another change.
VEGP LAR DOC A024: Ref ormat of GTS 3.3.1 into Seven Parts; 3.3.1 through 3.3.7; note that this maps GTS 3.3.1 requirements into interim A024-modified TS (MTS) Subsection 3.3.2, to which the other changes are applied.
VEGP LAR DOC A026: SR Note Change VEGP LAR DOC M01: Deletion of Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) Definition VEGP LAR DOC M02: Provision for Two or More Inoperable Divisions or Channels VEGP LAR DOC L07: Certain TS Required Actions Requiring the Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) to be Opened Are Revised into Two Required Actions VEGP LAR DOC L09: Revise Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 and related Conditions VEGP LAR DOC L10: Delete PTS 3.3.1 Function 16, Interlocks VEGP LAR DOC L11: Delete Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 third row and associated references
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 2 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
III. Comments on Relations Among TSTFs, RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Items, and RCOL PTS Changes
 
This section discusses the considered changes that are: (1) applicable to operating reactor designs, but not to the AP1000 design; (2) already incorporated in the GTS; or (3) superseded by another change.
 
TSTF-425-A deferred for future consideration.
TSTF-425-A deferred for future consideration.
TSTF-519-T has already been incorporated into the AP1000 GTS regarding the Writer's Guide for Improved Standard Technical Specifications (Reference 4) placement of Notes in TS Actions tables.
TSTF-519-T has already been incorporated into the AP1000 GTS regarding the Writer's Guide for Improved Standard Technical Specifications (Reference 4) placement of Notes in TS Actions tables.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 3
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 3 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
IV. Additional Changes Proposed as Part of this GTST (modifications proposed by NRC staff and/or clear editorial changes or deviations identified by preparer of GTST)


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 IV. Additional Changes Proposed as Part of this GTST (modifications proposed by NRC staff and/or clear editorial changes or deviations identified by preparer of GTST)
Uniformly use:
Uniformly use:
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Source Range Neutron Flux in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors.
* Source Range Neutron Flux
 
in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors.
 
Insert as-left in SR phrases within the allowed as-left tolerance. (NRC Staff Comment)
Insert as-left in SR phrases within the allowed as-left tolerance. (NRC Staff Comment)
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.
Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies.
Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies.
APOG Recommended Changes to Improve the Bases For added clarity, revise the opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 to state:
 
APOG Recommended Changes to Improve the Bases
 
For added clarity, revise the opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 to state:
 
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed.
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed.
Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier. (DOC A003)
Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier. (DOC A003)
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 4
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 4 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
V. Applicability
 
Affected Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:
 
Section 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
 
Changes to the Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 V. Applicability Affected Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:
Section 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation Changes to the Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:
GTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is reformatted by DOC A024 into multiple Specifications including interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation. The reformatting relocates GTS 3.3.1 Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, into MTS 3.3.2 as part of the LCO statement. The MTS format is depicted in Section XI of this GTST as the reference case in the markup of the GTS instrumentation requirements for the source range instrumentation.
GTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is reformatted by DOC A024 into multiple Specifications including interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation. The reformatting relocates GTS 3.3.1 Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, into MTS 3.3.2 as part of the LCO statement. The MTS format is depicted in Section XI of this GTST as the reference case in the markup of the GTS instrumentation requirements for the source range instrumentation.
MTS 3.3.2 LCO Title                         GTS 3.3.1 Function Reactor Trip System (RTS)                   5. Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint Source Range Instrumentation References 2, 3, and 6 provide details showing the correspondence of GTS 3.3.1 Functions and STS 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 Functions.
 
MTS 3.3.2 LCO Title GTS 3.3.1 Function
 
Reactor Trip System (RTS) 5. Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint Source Range Instrumentation
 
References 2, 3, and 6 provide details showing the correspondence of GTS 3.3.1 Functions and STS 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 Functions.
 
The Applicability Statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 is revised to Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. from Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. This avoids undesirable plant secondary effects due to interlock actuation. (DOC L07)
The Applicability Statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 is revised to Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. from Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. This avoids undesirable plant secondary effects due to interlock actuation. (DOC L07)
GTS 3.3.1 Conditions I, J, Q and R are reordered and relabeled as AP1000 MTS 3.3.2 Conditions A, B, C and D. (DOC A024)
GTS 3.3.1 Conditions I, J, Q and R are reordered and relabeled as AP1000 MTS 3.3.2 Conditions A, B, C and D. (DOC A024)
GTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, third row is deleted (including footnote (e)). This eliminates the need for MTS Condition D. The requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability. (DOC L11)
GTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, third row is deleted (including footnote (e)). This eliminates the need for MTS Condition D. The requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability. (DOC L11)
GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d), Below the P-6 (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux) interlocks, applies to operation in MODE 2 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODE 2. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a), With Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal, and footnote (e), With RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication, applies to operation in MODES 3, 4, and 5 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 and footnote (e) is eliminated. (DOC A024 and DOC L11)
 
GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d), Below the P-6 (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux) interlocks, applies to operation in MODE 2 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODE 2. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a), W ith Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal, and footnote (e), W ith RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication, applies to operation in MODES 3, 4, and 5 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 and footnote (e) is eliminated. (DOC A024 and DOC L11)
 
STS 3.3.2 Conditions A and B are added to provide Actions to place inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip in MODE 2. (DOC L09)
STS 3.3.2 Conditions A and B are added to provide Actions to place inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip in MODE 2. (DOC L09)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition A statement becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition C and is revised to reference new Actions A and B. (editorial result of DOC L09)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition A statement becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition C and is revised to reference new Actions A and B. (editorial result of DOC L09)
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 5
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 5 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
MTS 3.3.2 Condition B (STS 3.3.2 Condition F) is revised to address three or more inoperable channels. Otherwise, LCO 3.0.3 would apply when the LCO is not met and the associated Actions are not met or an associated Action is not provided. (DOC M02)


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 MTS 3.3.2 Condition B (STS 3.3.2 Condition F) is revised to address three or more inoperable channels. Otherwise, LCO 3.0.3 would apply when the LCO is not met and the associated Actions are not met or an associated Action is not provided. (DOC M02)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition A Action statement A.1 becomes STS 3.3.2 Action statement C.1 and is revised to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption. (TSTF-469-T)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition A Action statement A.1 becomes STS 3.3.2 Action statement C.1 and is revised to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption. (TSTF-469-T)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition C becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition D. The requirement to open RTBs associated with proposed MTS 3.3.2 Action Statement C.2 is replaced by two Actions to initiate action to fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. This provides flexibility to avoid potentially undesirable effects of opening RTBs and initiating certain interlocks. (DOC L07 and editorial result of DOC L09)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition C becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition D. The requirement to open RTBs associated with proposed MTS 3.3.2 Action Statement C.2 is replaced by two Actions to initiate action to fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. This provides flexibility to avoid potentially undesirable effects of opening RTBs and initiating certain interlocks. (DOC L07 and editorial result of DOC L09)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition D (GTS 3.3.1 Condition R) is deleted. This is related to the elimination of Function 5, third row requirement associated with GTS 3.3.1 Table 3.3.1-1. (DOC L11)
MTS 3.3.2 Condition D (GTS 3.3.1 Condition R) is deleted. This is related to the elimination of Function 5, third row requirement associated with GTS 3.3.1 Table 3.3.1-1. (DOC L11)
GTS SR 3.3.1.1 is retained and renumbered as MTS SR 3.3.2.1. GTS SR 3.3.1.8 and 3.3.1.9 are combined and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.2. GTS SR 3.3.1.11 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.3. GTS SR 3.3.1.13 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.4. No Function Table is required. The MTS format is depicted as the reference case in the attached markup. (DOC A024)
GTS SR 3.3.1.1 is retained and renumbered as MTS SR 3.3.2.1. GTS SR 3.3.1.8 and 3.3.1.9 are combined and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.2. GTS SR 3.3.1.11 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.3. GTS SR 3.3.1.13 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.4. No Function Table is required. The MTS format is depicted as the reference case in the attached markup. (DOC A024)
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is deleted. As discussed in the Bases, the interlock operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. (DOC L10)
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is deleted. As discussed in the Bases, the interlock operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. (DOC L10)
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 is revised from Perform RTCOT... to Perform COT... and Frequency Note is repositioned as a Surveillance Note, replacing the PTS Surveillance Note. The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. NUREG-1431 specifies the COT for similar Functions. The Note relocation is per the Writer's Guide (Reference 5). (DOC M01 and DOC A026)
 
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 is revised from Perf orm RTCOT... to Perform COT... and Frequency Note is repositioned as a Surveillance Note, replacing the PTS Surveillance Note. The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. NUREG-1431 specifies the COT for similar Functions. The Note relocation is per the Writer's Guide (Reference 5). (DOC M01 and DOC A026)
 
The Bases are revised to reflect these changes.
The Bases are revised to reflect these changes.
The following tables are provided as an aid to tracking the various changes to GTS 3.3.1 Conditions, Required Actions, Functions, Applicability Footnotes, and Surveillance Requirements that result in interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2.
The following tables are provided as an aid to tracking the various changes to GTS 3.3.1 Conditions, Required Actions, Functions, Applicability Footnotes, and Surveillance Requirements that result in interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2.
Changes to Conditions GTS 3.3.1   MTS 3.3.2   STS 3.3.2     Other STS Subsections             Additional Condition   Condition   Condition     Addressing the Listed Condition   DOC Changes
 
---         ---         A             ---                               L09
Changes to Conditions
---         ---         B             ---                               L09 A                                     3.3.1                             ---
 
B                                     3.3.5                             ---
GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional Condition Condition Condition Addressing the Listed Condition DOC Changes
C                                     3.3.5                             ---
--- --- A --- L09
D                                     3.3.1                             ---
--- --- B --- L09 A 3.3.1 ---
E                                     3.3.1                             ---
B 3.3.5 ---
F                                     3.3.3                             ---
C 3.3.5 ---
G                                     3.3.3                             ---
D 3.3.1 ---
H                                     3.3.3                             ---
E 3.3.1 ---
F 3.3.3 ---
G 3.3.3 ---
H 3.3.3 ---
 
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 6
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 6 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional Condition Condition Condition Addressing the Listed Condition DOC Changes I A C --- L09 J B F --- M02 K 3.3.1 ---
L 3.3.4, 3.3.6 ---
M 3.3.1 ---
N 3.3.7 ---
O 3.3.7 ---
P 3.3.4, 3.3.6 ---
Q C D GTS Condition Q split into 2 Conditions L07 Q --- E --- L07 R D --- Deleted L11
 
Changes to Functions
 
-------------------- Function [Modes(footnote)] ----------- STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Conditions and Additional Changes DOC Changes 5 [2(d)] LCO 3.3.2 LCO 3.3.2 A, B --- ---
5 [3(a),4(a),5(a)] LCO 3.3.2 LCO 3.3.2 C, D, E, F --- ---
5 [3(e),4(e),5(e)] LCO 3.3.2 --- --- Deleted L11
 
Changes to Applicability Footnotes
 
GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS Subsections Also Additional Changes Footnote Footnote Footnote Function Addressing Listed footnote DOC Number a -----LCO Applicability ----- --- 3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.3.6, 3.3.7 L07 d -----LCO Applicability ----- --- 3.3.3 ---
e --- Deleted --- --- L11
 
Changes to Surveillance Requirements
 
GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS Subsections Also Example Surveillance No.
SR SR SR Addressing the Listed SR Surveillance Description 3.3.1.1 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.1 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.1 CHANNEL CHECK
 
3.3.1.2 3.3.1 3.3.1.2 Compare calorimetric heat balance to NI channel output
 
3.3.1.3 3.3.1 3.3.1.3 Compare calorimetric heat balance to delta-T power calculation
 
3.3.1.4 3.3.1 3.3.1.4 Compare incore detector measurement to NI AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE
 
3.3.1.5 3.3.1 3.3.1.5 Calibrate excore channels
 
3.3.1.6 3.3.7 3.3.7.1 Perform TADOT
 
3.3.1.7 3.3.4, 3.3.6 3.3.4.1 ACTUATION LOGIC TEST
 
3.3.1.8 3.3.3.2 3.3.3.2 3.3.1 3.3.1.6 Perform COT
 
3.3.1.9 3.3.2.2 3.3.2.2 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.7 Perform COT
 
3.3.1.10 3.3.1 3.3.1.8 CHANNEL CALIBRATION
 
3.3.1.11 3.3.2.3 3.3.2.3 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.9 CHANNEL CALIBRATION
 
3.3.1.12 3.3.1, 3.3.5 3.3.1.10 Perform TADOT
 
3.3.1.13 3.3.2.4 3.3.2.4 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.11 Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to provide additional clarity. (APOG Comment)


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 GTS 3.3.1            MTS 3.3.2      STS 3.3.2          Other STS Subsections                        Additional Condition            Condition      Condition          Addressing the Listed Condition              DOC Changes I                    A              C                  ---                                          L09 J                    B              F                  ---                                          M02 K                                                      3.3.1                                        ---
L                                                      3.3.4, 3.3.6                                  ---
M                                                      3.3.1                                        ---
N                                                      3.3.7                                        ---
O                                                      3.3.7                                        ---
P                                                      3.3.4, 3.3.6                                  ---
Q                    C              D                  GTS Condition Q split into 2 Conditions      L07 Q                    ---            E                  ---                                          L07 R                    D              ---                Deleted                                      L11 Changes to Functions
--------------------      Function [Modes(footnote)] -----------      STS 3.3.2        Other STS Subsections            Additional GTS 3.3.1                      MTS 3.3.2          STS 3.3.2          Conditions      and Additional Changes          DOC Changes 5 [2(d)]                      LCO 3.3.2          LCO 3.3.2          A, B            ---                              ---
5 [3(a),4(a),5(a)]            LCO 3.3.2          LCO 3.3.2          C, D, E, F      ---                              ---
5 [3(e),4(e),5(e)]            LCO 3.3.2          ---                ---              Deleted                          L11 Changes to Applicability Footnotes GTS 3.3.1            MTS 3.3.2      STS 3.3.2    STS 3.3.2          STS Subsections Also            Additional Changes Footnote            Footnote        Footnote      Function            Addressing Listed footnote      DOC Number a                    -----LCO Applicability-----  ---                3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.3.6, 3.3.7      L07 d                    -----LCO Applicability-----  ---                3.3.3                          ---
e                    ---            Deleted      ---                ---                            L11 Changes to Surveillance Requirements GTS 3.3.1            MTS 3.3.2      STS 3.3.2      STS Subsections Also                          Example Surveillance No.
SR                  SR              SR            Addressing the Listed SR                        Surveillance Description 3.3.1.1              3.3.2.1        3.3.2.1        3.3.1, 3.3.3                                  3.3.1.1 CHANNEL CHECK 3.3.1.2                                            3.3.1                                          3.3.1.2 Compare calorimetric heat balance to NI channel output 3.3.1.3                                            3.3.1                                          3.3.1.3 Compare calorimetric heat balance to delta-T power calculation 3.3.1.4                                          3.3.1                                          3.3.1.4 Compare incore detector measurement to NI AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE 3.3.1.5                                          3.3.1                                          3.3.1.5 Calibrate excore channels 3.3.1.6                                          3.3.7                                          3.3.7.1 Perform TADOT 3.3.1.7                                          3.3.4, 3.3.6                                    3.3.4.1 ACTUATION LOGIC TEST 3.3.1.8              3.3.3.2        3.3.3.2        3.3.1                                          3.3.1.6 Perform COT 3.3.1.9              3.3.2.2        3.3.2.2        3.3.1, 3.3.3                                    3.3.1.7 Perform COT 3.3.1.10                                          3.3.1                                          3.3.1.8 CHANNEL CALIBRATION 3.3.1.11            3.3.2.3        3.3.2.3        3.3.1, 3.3.3                                    3.3.1.9 CHANNEL CALIBRATION 3.3.1.12                                          3.3.1, 3.3.5                                    3.3.1.10 Perform TADOT 3.3.1.13            3.3.2.4        3.3.2.4        3.3.1, 3.3.3                                    3.3.1.11 Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to provide additional clarity. (APOG Comment)
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                                                             Page 7
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 7 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
The nomenclature for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, Neutron Flux detectors is revised for consistency throughout the Bases. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)
 
The word interlock is removed af ter P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording. (NRC Staff Comment)


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 The nomenclature for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, Neutron Flux detectors is revised for consistency throughout the Bases. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)
The word interlock is removed after P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording. (NRC Staff Comment)
The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to provide consistency and clarity. (NRC Staff Comment)
The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to provide consistency and clarity. (NRC Staff Comment)
The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in references to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)
 
The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in ref erences to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)
 
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised to the correct citation. (Evaluation Comment)
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised to the correct citation. (Evaluation Comment)
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 8
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 8 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
VI. Traveler Information
 
Description of TSTF changes:


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 VI. Traveler Information Description of TSTF changes:
Required Actions which prohibit positive reactivity additions are corrected to prohibit positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The existing Required Actions do not accomplish the purpose as described in the Bases.
Required Actions which prohibit positive reactivity additions are corrected to prohibit positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The existing Required Actions do not accomplish the purpose as described in the Bases.
Rationale for TSTF changes:
Rationale for TSTF changes:
The proposed Required Actions will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Actions, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing actions.
The proposed Required Actions will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Actions, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing actions.
The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption.
The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption.
Description of changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:
Description of changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:
The Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (VEGP) technical specifications upgrade (TSU) License Amendment Request (VEGP TSU LAR) (Reference 2) proposed changes to the initial version of the VEGP PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP TSU LAR). As detailed in VEGP TSU LAR Enclosure 1, administrative change number 24 (DOC A024) reformats PTS 3.3.1 into multiple Specifications as follows:
The Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (VEGP) technical specifications upgrade (TSU) License Amendment Request (VEGP TSU LAR) (Reference 2) proposed changes to the initial version of the VEGP PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP TSU LAR). As detailed in VEGP TSU LAR Enclosure 1, administrative change number 24 (DOC A024) reformats PTS 3.3.1 into multiple Specifications as follows:
* 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation;
* 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation ;
* 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation;
* 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation ;
* 3.3.3, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Intermediate Range Instrumentation;
* 3.3.3, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Intermediate Range Instrumentation ;
* 3.3.4, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Engineered Safety Feature Actuation
* 3.3.4, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Engineered Safety Feature Actuation
* 3.3.5, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Manual Actuation;
* 3.3.5, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Manual Actuation ;
* 3.3.6, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Automatic Trip Logic; and
* 3.3.6, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Automatic Trip Logic ; and
* 3.3.7, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Trip Actuation Devices.
* 3.3.7, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Trip Actuation Devices.
Since PTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is identical to GTS 3.3.1, it is appropriate for this GTST to consider the proposed changes to PTS 3.3.1 as changes to GTS 3.3.1 for incorporation in AP1000 STS 3.3.2. DOC A024 is extensive, but retains the intention of PTS 3.3.1 while improving operational use of the TS. The numerous Functions, Conditions and extensive bases discussion associated with PTS 3.3.1 are repackaged into seven smaller parts. Therefore, the changes implemented by DOC A024 are presented in the attached Subsection 3.3.2 markup, in Section XI of this GTST, as the clean starting point for this GTST and are identified as interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2. The specific details of the reformatting for MTS 3.3.2 can be found in VEGP TSU LAR (Reference 2), in Enclosure 2 (markup) and Enclosure 4 (clean). The NRC staff safety evaluation regarding DOC A024 can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs in Reference 6 and the Southern Nuclear Operating Company RAI Response in Reference 7.
 
Since PTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is identical to GTS 3.3.1, it is appropriate for this GTST to consider the proposed changes to PTS 3.3.1 as changes to GTS 3.3.1 for incorporation in AP1000 STS 3.3.2. DOC A024 is extensive, but retains the intention of PTS 3.3.1 while improving operational use of the TS. The numerous Functions, Conditions and extensive bases discussion associated with PTS 3.3.1 are repackaged into seven smaller parts. Therefore, the changes implemented by DOC A024 are presented in the attached Subsection 3.3.2 markup, in Section XI of this GTST, as the clean starting point for this GTST and are identified as interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2. The specific details of the ref ormatting for MTS 3.3.2 can be found in VEGP TSU LAR (Reference 2), in Enclosure 2 (markup) and Enclosure 4 (clean). The NRC staff safety evaluation regarding DOC A024 can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs in Reference 6 and the Southern Nuclear Operating Company RAI Response in Reference 7.
 
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 9
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 9 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
DOC A026 moves the proposed MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Frequency Note Only required when not performed within previous 92 days to replace the PTS Surveillance Note. The new Surveillance Note states Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.
 
DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requirements from Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program, to Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 DOC A026 moves the proposed MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Frequency Note Only required when not performed within previous 92 days to replace the PTS Surveillance Note. The new Surveillance Note states Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.
DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requirements from Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program, to Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program.
DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable.
DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable.
DOC L07 revises the Action to open the RTBs into a two-step process to initiate action to fully insert all rods, and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
DOC L07 revises the Action to open the RTBs into a two-step process to initiate action to fully insert all rods, and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation.
DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation.
DOC L10 removes the MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions.
DOC L10 removes the MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions.
DOC L11 deletes MTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, third row for that function including applicability set 3(e),4(e),5(e) and associated references to Required Channel, Condition, and Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e); and PTS Action R.
DOC L11 deletes MTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, third row for that function including applicability set 3(e),4(e),5(e) and associated references to Required Channel, Condition, and Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e); and PTS Action R.
A more detailed description of the changes by each of the above DOCs can be found in Reference 2, VEGP TSU LAR in Enclosure 1; the NRC staff safety evaluation can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs (Reference 5) by Southern Nuclear Operating Companys RAI Response in Reference 6.
A more detailed description of the changes by each of the above DOCs can be found in Reference 2, VEGP TSU LAR in Enclosure 1; the NRC staff safety evaluation can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs (Reference 5) by Southern Nuclear Operating Companys RAI Response in Reference 6.
Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:
Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:
The reformatting per DOC A024, except where addressed in other DOCs, addresses inconsistencies in formatting and approach between PTS 3.3.1 and PTS 3.3.2, respectively.
The reformatting per DOC A024, except where addressed in other DOCs, addresses inconsistencies in formatting and approach between PTS 3.3.1 and PTS 3.3.2, respectively.
Simplification and clarification are proposed for each Specification. In breaking down each PTS Specification into specific subsets of the Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) function, improved human factored operator usability results.
Simplification and clarification are proposed for each Specification. In breaking down each PTS Specification into specific subsets of the Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) function, improved human factored operator usability results.
These improvements also reflect the general approach currently in use in the Improved Standard Technical Specifications (STS) for Babcock and Wilcox Plants, NUREG-1430, Rev. 4.
 
These improvements also reflect the general approach currently in use in the Improved Standard Technical Specifications (STS) for Babcock and W ilcox Plants, NUREG -1430, Rev. 4.
That is to separate the functions for [sensor] instrumentation, Manual Actuation, Trip/Actuation Logic, and Trip Actuation Devices (e.g., Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs)) into separate Specification subsections. Furthermore, the Actions for some ESFAS Functions generally involve a more complex presentation than needed for other Functions, such that simple common Actions are not reasonable. Such Functions are also provided with separate Specification subsections.
That is to separate the functions for [sensor] instrumentation, Manual Actuation, Trip/Actuation Logic, and Trip Actuation Devices (e.g., Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs)) into separate Specification subsections. Furthermore, the Actions for some ESFAS Functions generally involve a more complex presentation than needed for other Functions, such that simple common Actions are not reasonable. Such Functions are also provided with separate Specification subsections.
When TS instrument function tables are utilized to reference Actions, the generally preferred format of the Actions for an instrumentation Specification in NUREG-1430 is to provide the initial Actions that would be common to all of the specified functions (typically for bypassing and/or tripping one or two inoperable channels), then the default Action would direct consulting the function table for follow-on Actions applicable to the specific affected function. These follow-up Actions generally reflect the actions to exit the Applicability for that function.
 
W hen TS instrument function tables are utilized to reference Actions, the generally preferred format of the Actions for an instrumentation Specification in NUREG-1430 is to provide the initial Actions that would be common to all of the specified functions (typically for bypassing and/or tripping one or two inoperable channels), then the default Action would direct consulting the function table for follow-on Actions applicable to the specific affected function. These follow-up Actions generally reflect the actions to exit the Applicability for that function.
 
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 10
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 10 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
This format also allows splitting the default Actions from the initial preferred actions. This general approach is the standard format for other Specifications and for Instrumentation Specifications for other vendors Improved STS.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 This format also allows splitting the default Actions from the initial preferred actions. This general approach is the standard format for other Specifications and for Instrumentation Specifications for other vendors Improved STS.
DOC A026 is consistent with the TS Writer's Guide found in reference 5. DOC L10 notes that the GTS SR 3.3.1.9 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. GTS SR 3.3.1.9 is proposed as MTS SR 3.3.2.2. The requirement for verification that interlocks P-6 and P-10 are in their required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.
DOC A026 is consistent with the TS Writer's Guide found in reference 5. DOC L10 notes that the GTS SR 3.3.1.9 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. GTS SR 3.3.1.9 is proposed as MTS SR 3.3.2.2. The requirement for verification that interlocks P-6 and P-10 are in their required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.
DOC M01 notes that the definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints that are required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The PTS Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. The COT definition explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, because the definition of COT more closely aligns with the RTCOT test description provided in the bases, the COT is specified instead of an RTCOT. The RTCOT definition is deleted from TS Section 1.1. A COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps. The changes are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431.
DOC M01 notes that the definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints that are required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The PTS Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. The COT definition explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, because the definition of COT more closely aligns with the RTCOT test description provided in the bases, the COT is specified instead of an RTCOT. The RTCOT definition is deleted from TS Section 1.1. A COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps. The changes are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431.
DOC M02 directly provides for the default Actions of LCO 3.0.3 without allowing for the additional hour that LCO 3.0.3 permits prior to initiating shutdown. This provides clarity for the operator and is more restrictive than LCO 3.0.3.
DOC M02 directly provides for the default Actions of LCO 3.0.3 without allowing for the additional hour that LCO 3.0.3 permits prior to initiating shutdown. This provides clarity for the operator and is more restrictive than LCO 3.0.3.
DOC L07 notes that when the RTBs are opened, certain other interlocks can be initiated. The initiation of the associated interlocks may have an undesirable secondary effect on the ease of operation of the plant such as the initiation of the P-4 interlock, which, in the event of low RCS temperature, can result in isolation of main feedwater to the steam generators.
 
DOC L07 notes that when the RTBs are opened, certain other interlocks can be initiated. The initiation of the associated interlocks may have an undesirable secondary effect on the ease of operation of the plant such as the initiation of the P -4 interlock, which, in the event of low RCS temperature, can result in isolation of main feedwater to the steam generators.
 
DOC L09 places up to two inoperable channels in bypass or trip. In MODE 2, this allows continued operation and flexibility to continue a power ascension. Otherwise, further positive reactivity additions are not allowed per proposed MTS Action A.
DOC L09 places up to two inoperable channels in bypass or trip. In MODE 2, this allows continued operation and flexibility to continue a power ascension. Otherwise, further positive reactivity additions are not allowed per proposed MTS Action A.
DOC L10 notes that Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. Interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or initiate an ESFAS function, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS.
DOC L10 notes that Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. Interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or initiate an ESFAS function, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS.
Per DOC L11, the Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3, 4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in the PTS Applicability Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux channels for reactor trip functions to be Operable. As such, this requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability.
Per DOC L11, the Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3, 4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in the PTS Applicability Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux channels for reactor trip functions to be Operable. As such, this requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 11
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 11 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Description of additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST:


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Description of additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST:
The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to state:
The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to state:
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed. (APOG Comment)
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed. (APOG Comment)
The modifier PMS is deleted for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, detectors throughout the Bases. In addition, references to these three detector types are uniformly changed to:
The modifier PMS is deleted for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, detectors throughout the Bases. In addition, references to these three detector types are uniformly changed to:
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Source Range Neutron Flux in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)
* Source Range Neutron Flux
 
in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)
 
The second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs in the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 are revised to state:
The second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs in the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 are revised to state:
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 12
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 12 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or by pass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux -
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii). (NRC Staff Comment)
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii). (NRC Staff Comment)
The first paragraph in the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 is revised to state:
The first paragraph in the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 is revised to state:
In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected. (NRC Staff Comment)
In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected. (NRC Staff Comment)
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading A.1 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading A.1 is revised to state:
Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 13


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3. (NRC Staff Comment)
Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 13 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, w hile still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 is revised to state:
Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
(NRC Staff Comment)
(NRC Staff Comment)
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading C.1 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading C.1 is revised to state:
Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. (NRC Staff Comment)
Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. (NRC Staff Comment)
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading D.1 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading D.1 is revised to state:
Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2. (NRC Staff Comment)
Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2. (NRC Staff Comment)
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 is revised to state:
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                    Page 14


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. (NRC Staff Comment)
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 14 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading F.1 is revised to state:
In the same section, the paragraph under the heading F.1 is revised to state:
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately. (NRC Staff Comment)
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately. (NRC Staff Comment)
The first paragraph in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to state:
The first paragraph in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to state:
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RTCOT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response... (NRC Staff Comment)
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RT COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response... (NRC Staff Comment)
 
In the same section, the third paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
In the same section, the third paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RTCOT. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RT COT. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
In the same section, the sixth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
In the same section, the sixth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. (NRC Staff Comment)
To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. (NRC Staff Comment)
In the same section, the ninth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
In the same section, the ninth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:
This The test frequency COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
This The test frequency C OT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure. (NRC Staff Comment)
 
In the same section, the last two paragraphs are revised to state:
In the same section, the last two paragraphs are revised to state:
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 15


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance.
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 15 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance.
The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.
The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.
During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass. (NRC Staff Comment)
During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass. (NRC Staff Comment)
The first three paragraphs in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, are revised to state:
The first three paragraphs in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, are revised to state:
SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
(NRC Staff Comment)
(NRC Staff Comment)
The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in references to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)
The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in references to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 16
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 16 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta -T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. (Evaluation Comment)
 
Rationale for additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST :


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. (Evaluation Comment)
Rationale for additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST:
The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised for additional clarity.
The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised for additional clarity.
The Bases modifier PMS for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range detectors is unnecessary and inconsistent with other PMS instruments. The Bases references to all these detector types are standardized for consistency.
 
The Bases modifier PMS f or Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range detectors is unnecessary and inconsistent with other PMS instruments. The Bases references to all these detector types are standardized for consistency.
 
The non-technical change to the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2 provides clarity.
The non-technical change to the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2 provides clarity.
Since Bases references to FSAR Sections and Chapters are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier.
Since Bases references to FSAR Sections and Chapters are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier.
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised because OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1. Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. The reference citation is revised to correctly reflect the citation.
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised because OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1. Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. The reference citation is revised to correctly reflect the citation.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 17
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 17 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
VII. GTST Safety Evaluation
 
Technical Analysis:


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 VII. GTST Safety Evaluation Technical Analysis:
TSTF-469-T revises MTS Action A.1 to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The Required Action will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of required SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Action, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing action. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The Required Action will protect this assumption.
TSTF-469-T revises MTS Action A.1 to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The Required Action will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of required SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Action, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing action. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The Required Action will protect this assumption.
DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 description to state Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program, in place of Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program. PTS Section 1.1 defines a Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) as A RTCOT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the reactor trip channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of the required interlock and/or trip functions. The RTCOT may be performed by means of a series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps so that the entire channel is tested from the signal conditioner through the trip logic.
DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 description to state Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program, in place of Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program. PTS Section 1.1 defines a Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) as A RTCOT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the reactor trip channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of the required interlock and/or trip functions. The RTCOT may be performed by means of a series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps so that the entire channel is tested from the signal conditioner through the trip logic.
The STS Section 1.1 definition for Channel Operational Test (COT) per reference 2, DOC A001, states A COT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of all devices in the channel required for channel OPERABILITY. The COT shall include adjustments, as necessary, of the required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps.
The STS Section 1.1 definition for Channel Operational Test (COT) per reference 2, DOC A001, states A COT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of all devices in the channel required for channel OPERABILITY. The COT shall include adjustments, as necessary, of the required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps.
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requires an RTCOT, in accordance with the Setpoint Program, to be performed on each TS required automatic protection instrumentation Function. Each Function requiring performance of an RTCOT by MTS SR 3.3.2.2 also requires performance of a Channel Calibration by MTS SR 3.3.2.3. Therefore, the Functions referencing MTS SR 3.3.2.2 contain adjustable devices.
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requires an RTCOT, in accordance with the Setpoint Program, to be performed on each TS required automatic protection instrumentation Function. Each Function requiring performance of an RTCOT by MTS SR 3.3.2.2 also requires performance of a Channel Calibration by MTS SR 3.3.2.3. Therefore, the Functions referencing MTS SR 3.3.2.2 contain adjustable devices.
The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the Bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. A COT explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, the definition of a COT more closely aligns with the description of the testing provided in the Bases for MTS SR 3.3.2.2. Use of COT for this SR is consistent with similar testing specified in NUREG-1431, TS 3.3.1. Use of COT is also consistent with testing performed on other instrumentation specified in the PTS.
The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the Bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. A COT explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, the definition of a COT more closely aligns with the description of the testing provided in the Bases for MTS SR 3.3.2.2. Use of COT for this SR is consistent with similar testing specified in NUREG-1431, TS 3.3.1. Use of COT is also consistent with testing performed on other instrumentation specified in the PTS.
The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4.
The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4.
DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable. GTS LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, and states:
DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable. GTS LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, and states:
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 18
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 18 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated within 1 hour to place the unit, as applicable,
When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated within 1 hour to place the unit, as applicable,
: a. MODE 3 within 7 hours; and
: a. MODE 3 within 7 hours; and
: b. MODE 4 within 13 hours; and
: b. MODE 4 within 13 hours; and
: c. MODE 5 within 37 hours.
: c. MODE 5 within 37 hours.
GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 Functions with applicability statements that include MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, generally have no Actions specified for addressing a loss of function condition, such as when all required channels are inoperable. Upon discovery of such a condition, LCO 3.0.3 would apply.
GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 Functions with applicability statements that include MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, generally have no Actions specified for addressing a loss of function condition, such as when all required channels are inoperable. Upon discovery of such a condition, LCO 3.0.3 would apply.
The intent of LCO 3.0.3 (as stated in the TS Bases) is to impose time limits for placing the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition when operation cannot be maintained within the limits for safe operation as defined by the LCO and its ACTIONS.
The intent of LCO 3.0.3 (as stated in the TS Bases) is to impose time limits for placing the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition when operation cannot be maintained within the limits for safe operation as defined by the LCO and its ACTIONS.
The Actions for inoperable RTS and ESFAS instrumentation provide restoration time and/or compensatory action allowances (e.g., place the inoperable channel in trip); but only for inoperability of some of the channels (e.g., 1 or 2 out of 4 required channels, typically). If these restoration and/or compensatory actions cannot be met in the required time, default actions are provided, which are designed to place the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition -
The Actions for inoperable RTS and ESFAS instrumentation provide restoration time and/or compensatory action allowances (e.g., place the inoperable channel in trip); but only for inoperability of some of the channels (e.g., 1 or 2 out of 4 required channels, typically). If these restoration and/or compensatory actions cannot be met in the required time, default actions are provided, which are designed to place the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition -
typically, actions that result in exiting the Applicability for that Function.
typically, actions that result in exiting the Applicability for that Function.
The shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 are typical of default actions throughout the TS that direct plant shutdown to exit the Applicability, with the exception that LCO 3.0.3 includes an additional 1 hour before the shutdown is required to be initiated.
The shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 are typical of default actions throughout the TS that direct plant shutdown to exit the Applicability, with the exception that LCO 3.0.3 includes an additional 1 hour before the shutdown is required to be initiated.
The revisions described in DOC M02 address multiple-channel inoperability. The revisions will immediately impose the default Actions for that Function - without allowance for the 1 hour delay that is provided in LCO 3.0.3. Furthermore, the Function-specific default actions (currently, or proposed to be, specified for some Functions) impose requirements intended to establish safe operation that are not necessarily required by LCO 3.0.3. Since each Function-specific default action is specifically considering that Functions safety-basis, such default actions necessarily result in more appropriate actions than the general default actions of LCO 3.0.3. Specifically, the Actions for each new Condition associated with DOC M02 for RTS and ESFAS Functions applicable in MODES1, 2, 3, or 4, are compared to LCO 3.0.3, and in each case, the new Actions are equivalent to or more restrictive than the actions of LCO 3.0.3.
 
The revisions described in DOC M02 address multiple-channel inoperability. The revisions will immediately impose the default Actions for that Function - without allowance for the 1 hour delay that is provided in LCO 3.0.3. Furthermore, the Function-specific def ault actions (currently, or proposed to be, specified for some Functions) impose requirements intended to establish safe operation that are not necessarily required by LCO 3.0.3. Since each Function-specific default action is specifically considering that Functions safety-basis, such default actions necessarily result in more appropriate actions than the general default actions of LCO 3.0.3. Specifically, the Actions for each new Condition associated with DOC M02 for RTS and ESFAS Functions applicable in MODES1, 2, 3, or 4, are compared to LCO 3.0.3, and in each case, the new Actions are equivalent to or more restrictive than the actions of LCO 3.0.3.
 
STS 3.3.2 Condition F leads to a default action to exit the LCO Applicability immediately, which is more restrictive than the time allowed by LCO 3.0.3. These actions, which are introduced by DOC L07, as discussed below, are not found in LCO 3.0.3.
STS 3.3.2 Condition F leads to a default action to exit the LCO Applicability immediately, which is more restrictive than the time allowed by LCO 3.0.3. These actions, which are introduced by DOC L07, as discussed below, are not found in LCO 3.0.3.
GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 actions do not specify conditions that explicitly address multiple inoperable channels (that is, more than two inoperable channels or divisions, in most cases), and therefore default to LCO 3.0.3. In each instance, the proposed actions to address these conditions are more restrictive than the LCO 3.0.3 actions because completion times for reaching lower operational modes are shorter by 1 hour. In addition, Function-specific actions, where specified, are more appropriate for the affected Function than the unit-shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 alone. Therefore, the changes specified by DOC M02 do not introduce any adverse impact on public health and safety.
GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 actions do not specify conditions that explicitly address multiple inoperable channels (that is, more than two inoperable channels or divisions, in most cases), and therefore default to LCO 3.0.3. In each instance, the proposed actions to address these conditions are more restrictive than the LCO 3.0.3 actions because completion times for reaching lower operational modes are shorter by 1 hour. In addition, Function-specific actions, where specified, are more appropriate for the affected Function than the unit-shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 alone. Therefore, the changes specified by DOC M02 do not introduce any adverse impact on public health and safety.
Each of the PTS 3.3.1 required actions to open the reactor trip breakers (RTBs) is intended to ensure that control rods cannot be withdrawn thereby eliminating the possibility for control rod related positive reactivity additions and associated heat input into the reactor coolant.
Each of the PTS 3.3.1 required actions to open the reactor trip breakers (RTBs) is intended to ensure that control rods cannot be withdrawn thereby eliminating the possibility for control rod related positive reactivity additions and associated heat input into the reactor coolant.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 19
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 19 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Additionally, all control rods are inserted by opening the RTBs. Therefore, replacing each required action to open RTBs with the two actions, which require initiating action to fully insert all rods and placing the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal, maintains the intent of the PTS action requirements. DOC L07 replaces the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and ensuring all rods are inserted while maintaining the requirement for establishing the plant conditions equivalent to opening the RTBs. The revised actions still ensure rod withdrawal is precluded and all rods are inserted; therefore, the detail to open the RTBs is not required to be in the TS to provide adequate protection of the public health and saf ety.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Additionally, all control rods are inserted by opening the RTBs. Therefore, replacing each required action to open RTBs with the two actions, which require initiating action to fully insert all rods and placing the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal, maintains the intent of the PTS action requirements. DOC L07 replaces the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and ensuring all rods are inserted while maintaining the requirement for establishing the plant conditions equivalent to opening the RTBs. The revised actions still ensure rod withdrawal is precluded and all rods are inserted; therefore, the detail to open the RTBs is not required to be in the TS to provide adequate protection of the public health and safety.
To ensure that when the revised required actions are taken the unit is removed from the operational modes or other specified conditions in the Specifications Applicability, conforming revisions to the Applicability statements are made. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs closed is the condition of Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. However, since rods could have been withdrawn prior to making the Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal, the revised Specifications include the additional condition of or one or more rods not fully inserted. This change also aligns with the required actions to both fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs open is the condition of Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted.
To ensure that when the revised required actions are taken the unit is removed from the operational modes or other specified conditions in the Specifications Applicability, conforming revisions to the Applicability statements are made. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs closed is the condition of Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. However, since rods could have been withdrawn prior to making the Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal, the revised Specifications include the additional condition of or one or more rods not fully inserted. This change also aligns with the required actions to both fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs open is the condition of Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted.
Removing the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and establishing all rods inserted, and defining this condition solely in terms of the RTB status, from the TS is acceptable because this type of information is not necessary to be included to provide adequate protection of public health and safety. AP1000 STS 3.3.2 retains requirements to ensure that control rod withdrawal is prohibited and all rods are inserted, when required. DOC L07 is designated as a less restrictive change because one specific method for meeting the intended TS requirements is being removed from the TS, and replaced with actions to allow using alternate methods to establish the equivalent operational conditions.
Removing the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and establishing all rods inserted, and defining this condition solely in terms of the RTB status, from the TS is acceptable because this type of information is not necessary to be included to provide adequate protection of public health and safety. AP1000 STS 3.3.2 retains requirements to ensure that control rod withdrawal is prohibited and all rods are inserted, when required. DOC L07 is designated as a less restrictive change because one specific method for meeting the intended TS requirements is being removed from the TS, and replaced with actions to allow using alternate methods to establish the equivalent operational conditions.
DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation. GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action I.1 (Suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions), for one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable in Mode 2, restricts power ascension. The VEGP LAR DOC L09 change adding STS 3.3.2 Actions A and B for these conditions requires placing the inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip. Completing these Required Actions allows continued operation and the flexibility to continue power ascension. This is a less restrictive change.
 
As summarized in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Table 7.2-2, Reactor Trips, each automatic RTS function is provided with 4 channels, with division trip logic of 2-out-of-four (2/4) and similar bypass logic and capability. This bypass capability is also described in the TS Bases:
DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation. GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action I.1 ( Suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions ), for one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable in Mode 2, restricts power ascension. The VEGP LAR DOC L09 change adding STS 3.3.2 Actions A and B for these conditions requires placing the inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip. Completing these Required Actions allows continued operation and the flexibility to continue power ascension. This is a less restrictive change.
 
As summarized in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Table 7.2-2, Reactor Trips, each automatic RTS function is provided with 4 channels, with division trip logic of 2-out-of-f our ( 2/4 )
and similar bypass logic and capability. This bypass capability is also described in the TS Bases:
 
The use of four channels for protection functions is based on a minimum of two channels being required for a trip or actuation, one channel in test or bypass, and a single failure on the remaining channel. The signal selector algorithm in the Plant Control System (PLS) will function with only three channels. This includes two channels properly functioning and one channel having a single failure. For protection channels providing data to the control system, the fourth channel permits one channel to be in test or bypass. Minimum requirements for protection and control are achieved with only three channels OPERABLE. The fourth channel is provided to increase plant availability, and permits the plant to run for an indefinite time with a single channel out of service.
The use of four channels for protection functions is based on a minimum of two channels being required for a trip or actuation, one channel in test or bypass, and a single failure on the remaining channel. The signal selector algorithm in the Plant Control System (PLS) will function with only three channels. This includes two channels properly functioning and one channel having a single failure. For protection channels providing data to the control system, the fourth channel permits one channel to be in test or bypass. Minimum requirements for protection and control are achieved with only three channels OPERABLE. The fourth channel is provided to increase plant availability, and permits the plant to run for an indefinite time with a single channel out of service.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 20
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 20 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Furthermore, the RTS TS Bases for Function 5 specifically describe this capability for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function: This same discussion appears in other automatic RTS Function Bases.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Furthermore, the RTS TS Bases for Function 5 specifically describe this capability for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function: This same discussion appears in other automatic RTS Function Bases.
Four channels are provided to permit one channel in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.
Four channels are provided to permit one channel in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.
The requirement to bypass and/or trip one and two inoperable automatic channels is applicable to most other automatic channels as provided in GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Actions E, F, and K. These Actions have the same provisions for tripping and/or bypassing inoperable channels. Currently, with one or two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) For two inoperable channels, with one channel bypassed and one channel tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion.
The requirement to bypass and/or trip one and two inoperable automatic channels is applicable to most other automatic channels as provided in GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Actions E, F, and K. These Actions have the same provisions for tripping and/or bypassing inoperable channels. Currently, with one or two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) For two inoperable channels, with one channel bypassed and one channel tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion.
Therefore, the change to provide Actions to bypass or trip one inoperable channel and bypass one channel and trip one channel for two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels is consistent with the design and consistent with the intent as described in the TS Bases for these Functions. Based on the Completion Times for AP1000 GTS 3.3.1 Action F, applicable to Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels, bypassing and/or tripping within 2 hours is provided for the STS 3.3.2, Actions A and B. Since RTS trip capability remains with one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, the additional 2 hours allowed by Actions A and B do not have any significant impact on safety. The current action in the GTS/PTS to suspend all operations involving positive reactivity additions unless all four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are Operable is overly restrictive given RTS trip capability remains and that the safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux- High reactor trip Function, as stated in the Bases.
 
Therefore, the change to provide Actions to bypass or trip one inoperable channel and bypass one channel and trip one channel for two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels is consistent with the design and consistent with the intent as described in the TS Bases for these Functions. Based on the Completion Times for AP1000 GTS 3.3.1 Action F, applicable to Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels, bypassing and/or tripping within 2 hours is provided for the STS 3.3.2, Actions A and B. Since RTS trip capability remains with one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, the additional 2 hours allowed by Actions A and B do not have any significant impact on safety. The current action in the GTS/PTS to suspend all operations involving positive reactivity additions unless all four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are Operable is overly restrictive given RTS trip capability remains and that the safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux-High reactor trip Function, as stated in the Bases.
 
The DOC L09 change results in closer alignment with Actions for other automatic RTS Functions. The actions continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis such as preserving single-failure criterion for indefinite operations. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.
The DOC L09 change results in closer alignment with Actions for other automatic RTS Functions. The actions continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis such as preserving single-failure criterion for indefinite operations. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.
DOC L10 removes Function 12, Reactor Trip System Interlocks (P-6, P-10, and P-11), from MTS 3.3.1, Table 3.3.1-1. RTS interlocks are provided to ensure reactor trip system instrumentation and actuation Functions are in the correct configuration for the current plant status. They back up operator actions to ensure protection system Functions are not blocked during plant conditions in which the safety analysis assumes the Functions are Operable.
DOC L10 removes Function 12, Reactor Trip System Interlocks (P-6, P-10, and P-11), from MTS 3.3.1, Table 3.3.1-1. RTS interlocks are provided to ensure reactor trip system instrumentation and actuation Functions are in the correct configuration for the current plant status. They back up operator actions to ensure protection system Functions are not blocked during plant conditions in which the safety analysis assumes the Functions are Operable.
The interlocks, as separate RTS and ESFAS Functions are removed from the GTS and the associated action requirements are deleted. Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each supported Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for reactor trip logic and ESF actuation logic operability.
The interlocks, as separate RTS and ESFAS Functions are removed from the GTS and the associated action requirements are deleted. Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each supported Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for reactor trip logic and ESF actuation logic operability.
For these supported RTS and ESFAS instrumentation and actuation Functions to be Operable, the associated RTS and ESFAS interlock functions would have to be in the required state as a support feature for Operability. These RTS and ESFAS interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or actuate ESFAS, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS. The role of the interlocks, and their support for the operability of RTS trip and ESFAS Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                          Page 21


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 actuation Functions, are described in the TS Bases, as well as in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapter 7, Instrumentation and Controls.
For these supported RTS and ESFAS instrumentation and actuation Functions to be Operable, the associated RTS and ESFAS interlock functions would have to be in the required state as a support feature for Operability. These RTS and ESFAS interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or actuate ESFAS, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS. The role of the interlocks, and their support for the operability of RTS trip and ESFAS
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 21 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
actuation Functions, are described in the TS Bases, as well as in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapter 7, Instrumentation and Controls.
 
Furthermore, each RTS trip and ESFAS actuation Function is required operable during the stated TS Applicability. The Applicability for certain trip or actuation Functions is based on transitioning above or below an interlock; while other Functions are not directly supported by an interlock. For Functions supported by an interlock, while operating within the TS required Applicability for that Function, its associated supporting interlock is not required to automatically change state. The interlock status must be established in conjunction with assuring supported Functions operability prior to entering the specified Applicability. In addition, LCO 3.0.4 requires the operators to ensure RTS trip and ESFAS operability prior to entering their specified Applicability. These TS requirements remain in effect and impose the necessary operability requirements related to the removed interlock Functions. As such, interlocks are adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability.
Furthermore, each RTS trip and ESFAS actuation Function is required operable during the stated TS Applicability. The Applicability for certain trip or actuation Functions is based on transitioning above or below an interlock; while other Functions are not directly supported by an interlock. For Functions supported by an interlock, while operating within the TS required Applicability for that Function, its associated supporting interlock is not required to automatically change state. The interlock status must be established in conjunction with assuring supported Functions operability prior to entering the specified Applicability. In addition, LCO 3.0.4 requires the operators to ensure RTS trip and ESFAS operability prior to entering their specified Applicability. These TS requirements remain in effect and impose the necessary operability requirements related to the removed interlock Functions. As such, interlocks are adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability.
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. The requirement for verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.
MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. The requirement for verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.
If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate operability evaluations performed for the affected Function(s), which would evaluate potential operability impact on individual instrument Function channels and/or the coincident logic subsystem channel. Adverse impacts to operability could be evaluated to affect individual instrumentation channels, or may be evaluated to impact the divisional coincident logic. In either outcome, the appropriate actions are provided by the LCO Actions for affected supported feature(s).
If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate operability evaluations performed for the affected Function(s), which would evaluate potential operability impact on individual instrument Function channels and/or the coincident logic subsystem channel. Adverse impacts to operability could be evaluated to affect individual instrumentation channels, or may be evaluated to impact the divisional coincident logic. In either outcome, the appropriate actions are provided by the LCO Actions for affected supported feature(s).
Instrument Function channels with interlocks implicitly required to support the channel's operability, are also addressed by the COT and Channel Calibration Surveillance Requirements.
Instrument Function channels with interlocks implicitly required to support the channel's operability, are also addressed by the COT and Channel Calibration Surveillance Requirements.
Actuation logic divisions with interlocks implicitly required to support the divisions operability is also addressed by the Actuation Logic Test Surveillance Requirements. The applicable COT, Channel Calibration, and Actuation Logic Test Bases will include the following discussion supporting this change (CHANNEL CALIBRATION is replaced with COT or ACTUATION LOGIC TEST as appropriate):
Actuation logic divisions with interlocks implicitly required to support the divisions operability is also addressed by the Actuation Logic Test Surveillance Requirements. The applicable COT, Channel Calibration, and Actuation Logic Test Bases will include the following discussion supporting this change ( CHANNEL CALIBRATION is replaced with COT or ACTUATION LOGIC TEST as appropriate):
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
 
DOC L11 deletes GTS/PTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux - High, requirements for 1 channel to be operable in Modes 3(e), 4(e), and 5(e) and the associated references to the required number of channels (Required Channels), applicable Actions (Condition), and applicable Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e) (With RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication.);
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. W hen an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
and GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action R. The Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3, Date report generated:
 
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 22
DOC L11 deletes GTS/PTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux - High, requirements for 1 channel to be operable in Modes 3(e), 4(e), and 5(e) and the associated references to the required number of channels (Required Channels), applicable Actions (Condition), and applicable Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e) (W ith RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication.);
and GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action R. The Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3,


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to be operable.
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 22 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to be operable.
Therefore, the operability, applicability, action, and surveillance requirements for one Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel are inappropriately placed in the Reactor Trip System Specification.
Therefore, the operability, applicability, action, and surveillance requirements for one Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel are inappropriately placed in the Reactor Trip System Specification.
GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Engineered Safeguards Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, requires 4 Source Range Neutron Flux channels to be Operable in Modes 3(n), 4(e), and 5(e),
GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Engineered Safeguards Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, requires 4 Source Range Neutron Flux channels to be Operable in Modes 3(n), 4(e), and 5(e),
(Footnote (n): Not applicable when critical or during intentional approach to criticality; Footnote (e): Not applicable for valve isolation Functions whose associated flow path is isolated). This Applicability includes the specified Applicability of GTS/PTS LCO 3.3.1 for one operable Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, which is being omitted from AP1000 STS LCO 3.3.2. Furthermore, the SRs for the Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels also encompass the GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Channel Check and Channel Calibration Surveillances for a Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, that are being omitted from STS Section 3.3.
(Footnote (n): Not applicable when critical or during intentional approach to criticality ;
GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Action R applies solely for inoperability of the one required Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel (i.e., the condition of all four Source Range Neutron Flux indication channels inoperable). In the unlikely event that all four channels were inoperable, the GTS/PTS 3.3.2 action requirements associated with the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels, are appropriate to provide the necessary protection. Changes to these Actions are addressed in changes to GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling Function, and are reflected in the MTS 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation. The MTS 3.3.8 Actions direct entering applicable actions for inoperable valves associated with boron dilution flow paths, i.e., TS 3.1.9, Chemical and Volume Control System (CVS) Demineralized Water Isolation Valves and Makeup Line Isolation Valves.
Footnote (e): Not applicable for valve isolation Functions whose associated flow path is isolated ). This Applicability includes the specified Applicability of GTS/PTS LCO 3.3.1 for one operable Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, which is being omitted from AP1000 STS LCO 3.3.2. Furthermore, the SRs for the Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels also encompass the GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Channel Check and Channel Calibration Surveillances for a Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, that are being omitted from STS Section 3.3.
 
GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Action R applies solely for inoperability of the one required Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel (i.e., the condition of all four Source Range Neutron Flux indication channels inoperable). In the unlikely event that all four channels were inoperable, the GTS/PTS 3.3.2 action requirements associated with the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels, are appropriate to provide the necessary protection. Changes to these Actions are addressed in changes to GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling Function, and are reflected in the MTS 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation. The MTS 3.3.8 Actions direct entering applicable actions for inoperable valves associated with boron dilution flow paths, i.e., TS 3.1.9, Chemical and Volume Control System (CVS) Demineralized W ater Isolation Valves and Makeup Line Isolation Valves.
STS 3.1.9 Action B would apply to this condition (i.e., all required valves would be considered inoperable) and require isolation of the affected flow paths within 1 hour, consistent with GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Required Action R.2. The potential for an uncontrolled boron dilution accident is eliminated by isolating all unborated water sources as required by this action. This change eliminates GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Required Actions R.1 (suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions) and R.3 (perform Shutdown Margin verifications); however, with the RTBs open and potential boron dilution paths isolated, unit safety is adequately maintained without completing these other, currently specified, required actions.
STS 3.1.9 Action B would apply to this condition (i.e., all required valves would be considered inoperable) and require isolation of the affected flow paths within 1 hour, consistent with GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Required Action R.2. The potential for an uncontrolled boron dilution accident is eliminated by isolating all unborated water sources as required by this action. This change eliminates GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Required Actions R.1 (suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions) and R.3 (perform Shutdown Margin verifications); however, with the RTBs open and potential boron dilution paths isolated, unit safety is adequately maintained without completing these other, currently specified, required actions.
This change is consistent with changes made in TSTF-135, 3.3 - RPS and ESFAS Instrumentation, Revision 3, and as reflected in NUREG-1431. Therefore, this change results in closer alignment with NUREG-1431 presentation of Source Range Neutron Flux indication instrumentation. The Actions of AP1000 STS 3.3.8 and 3.1.9 for the Condition of no operable channels of the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.
This change is consistent with changes made in TSTF-135, 3.3 - RPS and ESFAS Instrumentation, Revision 3, and as reflected in NUREG-1431. Therefore, this change results in closer alignment with NUREG-1431 presentation of Source Range Neutron Flux indication instrumentation. The Actions of AP1000 STS 3.3.8 and 3.1.9 for the Condition of no operable channels of the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.
Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.
Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. Therefore, APP-GW-GSC-020 is the correct reference.
Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. Therefore, APP-GW-GSC-020 is the correct reference.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 23
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 23 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
The remaining changes, including those made by DOC A024, are editorial, clarifying, grammatical, or otherwise considered administrative. These changes do not affect the technical content, but improve the readability, implementation, and understanding of the requirements, and are therefore acceptable.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 The remaining changes, including those made by DOC A024, are editorial, clarifying, grammatical, or otherwise considered administrative. These changes do not affect the technical content, but improve the readability, implementation, and understanding of the requirements, and are therefore acceptable.
Having found that this GTSTs proposed changes to the GTS and Bases are acceptable, the NRC staff concludes that AP1000 STS Subsection 3.3.2 is an acceptable model Specification for the AP1000 standard reactor design.
Having found that this GTSTs proposed changes to the GTS and Bases are acceptable, the NRC staff concludes that AP1000 STS Subsection 3.3.2 is an acceptable model Specification for the AP1000 standard reactor design.
References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs):
References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs):
None Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                  Page 24


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 VIII. Review Information Evaluator Comments:
None
None Randy Belles Oak Ridge National Laboratory 865-574-0388 bellesrj@ornl.gov Review Information:
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 24 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
VIII. Review Information
 
Evaluator Comments:
 
None
 
Randy Belles Oak Ridge National Laboratory 865-574- 0388 bellesrj@ornl.gov
 
Review Information:
 
Availability for public review and comment on Revision 0 of this traveler approved by NRC staff on 5/29/2014.
Availability for public review and comment on Revision 0 of this traveler approved by NRC staff on 5/29/2014.
APOG Comments (Ref. 8) and Resolutions:
APOG Comments (Ref. 8) and Resolutions:
: 1.   (Internal # 3 and # 146) Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate (DOC A003) to include the FSAR modifier. This is resolved by adding the FSAR modifier as appropriate.
: 1. (Internal # 3 and # 146) Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate (DOC A003) to include the FSAR modifier. This is resolved by adding the FSAR modifier as appropriate.
: 2.   (Internal # 6) The GTST sections often repeat VEGP LAR DOCs, which reference existing and current requirements. The inclusion in the GTST of references to existing and current, are not always valid in the context of the GTS. Each occurrence of existing and current should be revised to be clear and specific to GTS, MTS, or VEGP COL TS (or other), as appropriate. Noted ambiguities are corrected in the GTST body.
: 2. (Internal # 6) The GTST sections often repeat VEGP LAR DOCs, which reference existing and current requirements. The inclusion in the GTST of references to existing and current, are not always valid in the context of the GTS. Each occurrence of existing and current should be revised to be clear and specific to GTS, MTS, or VEGP COL TS (or other), as appropriate. Noted ambiguities are corrected in the GTST body.
: 3.   (Internal # 7) Section VII, GTST Safety Evaluation, inconsistently completes the subsection References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs) by citing the associated SE for VEGP 3&4 COL Amendment 13. It is not clear whether there is a substantive intended difference when omitting the SE citation. This is resolved by removing the SE citation in Section VII of the GTST and ensuring that appropriate references to the consistent citation of this reference in Section X of the GTST are made.
: 3. (Internal # 7) Section VII, GTST Safety Evaluation, inconsistently completes the subsection References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs) by citing the associated SE for VEGP 3&4 COL Amendment 13. It is not clear whether there is a substantive intended difference when omitting the SE citation. This is resolved by removing the SE citation in Section VII of the GTST and ensuring that appropriate references to the consistent citation of this reference in Section X of the GTST are made.
: 4.   (Internal #13) Many GTSTs evaluated TSTF-425 with the following note: Risk-informed TS changes will be considered at a later time for application to the AP1000 STS.
: 4. (Internal #13) Many GTSTs evaluated TSTF-425 with the following note: Risk-informed TS changes will be considered at a later time for application to the AP1000 STS.
The NRC approval of TSTF-425, and model safety evaluation provided in the CLIIP for TSTF-425, are generically applicable to any designs Technical Specifications. As such, the replacement of certain Frequencies with a Surveillance Frequency Control Program should be included in the GTST for AP1000 STS NUREG.
 
The NRC approval of TSTF -425, and model safety evaluation provided in the CLIIP for TSTF-425, are generically applicable to any designs Technical Specifications. As such, the replacement of certain Frequencies with a Surveillance Frequency Control Program should be included in the GTST for AP1000 STS NUREG.
 
However, implementation in the AP1000 STS should not reflect optional (i.e., bracketed) material showing retention of fixed Surveillance Frequencies where relocation to a Surveillance Frequency Control Program is acceptable. Since each represented AP1000 Utility is committed to maintaining standardization, there is no rationale for an AP1000 STS that includes bracketed options.
However, implementation in the AP1000 STS should not reflect optional (i.e., bracketed) material showing retention of fixed Surveillance Frequencies where relocation to a Surveillance Frequency Control Program is acceptable. Since each represented AP1000 Utility is committed to maintaining standardization, there is no rationale for an AP1000 STS that includes bracketed options.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 25
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 25 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Consistent with TSTF-425 criteria, replace applicable Surveillance Frequencies with In accordance with the Surveillance Frequency control Program and add that Program as new AP1000 STS Specification 5.5.15.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Consistent with TSTF-425 criteria, replace applicable Surveillance Frequencies with In accordance with the Surveillance Frequency control Program and add that Program as new AP1000 STS Specification 5.5.15.
NRC Staff disagreed with implementing TSTF-425 in the initial version of the STS.
NRC Staff disagreed with implementing TSTF-425 in the initial version of the STS.
Although the APOG thinks the analysis supporting this traveler is general enough to be applicable to AP1000, staff thinks an AP1000-specific proposal from APOG is needed to identify any GTS SRs that should be excluded. Also, with the adoption of a Surveillance Frequency Control Program (SFCP) in the AP1000 STS, bracketed Frequencies, which provide a choice between the GTS Frequency and the SFCP Frequency, are needed because the NRC will use the AP1000 STS as a reference, and to be consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4. APOG was requested to consider proposing an AP1000 version of TSTF-425 for a subsequent revision of the STS.
Although the APOG thinks the analysis supporting this traveler is general enough to be applicable to AP1000, staff thinks an AP1000- specific proposal from APOG is needed to identify any GTS SRs that should be excluded. Also, with the adoption of a Surveillance Frequency Control Program (SFCP) in the AP1000 STS, bracketed Frequencies, which provide a choice between the GTS Frequency and the SFCP Frequency, are needed because the NRC will use the AP1000 STS as a reference, and to be consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4. APOG was requested to consider proposing an AP1000 version of TSTF-425 for a subsequent revision of the STS.
: 5.   (Internal # 116) In GTST for Subsection 3.3.2, Section VI, under the heading Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes, the first paragraph mentions DOC A028. This DOC is for changes to ESFAS TS and does not affect Subsection 3.3.2. Note that it is not mentioned anywhere else in this Subsection. This is also stated in Subsection 3.3.1 and Subsections 3.3.3 through 3.3.7. Change DOCs A024 and A028 to DOC A024 in GTST 3.3.1 through GTST 3.3.7. This is resolved by making the recommended change.
: 5. (Internal # 116) In GTST for Subsection 3.3.2, Section VI, under the heading Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes, the f irst paragraph mentions DOC A028. This DOC is for changes to ESFAS TS and does not affect Subsection 3.3.2. Note that it is not mentioned anywhere else in this Subsection. This is also stated in Subsection 3.3.1 and Subsections 3.3.3 throug h 3.3.7. Change DOCs A024 and A028 to DOC A024 in GTST 3.3.1 through GTST 3.3.7. This is resolved by making the recommended change.
: 6.   (Internal # 119) The modifier PMS for power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases. NRC Staff notes that this comment also applies to STS Subsections 3.3.1, 3.3.3, 3.3.8, and 3.9.3. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits. NRC staff notes that the initial use of Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) in the Bases for an STS Subsection should be retained. In addition, NRC staff proposes to uniformly use
: 6. (Internal # 119) The modifier PMS f or power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases. NRC Staff notes that this comment also applies to STS Subsections 3.3.1, 3.3.3, 3.3.8, and 3.9.3. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits. NRC staff notes that the initial use of Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) in the Bases for an STS Subsection should be retained. In addition, NRC staff proposes to uniformly use
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Power Range Neutron Flux,
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
* Source Range Neutron Flux in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. NRC staff further proposes to remove interlock after P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording.
* Source Range Neutron Flux
 
in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. NRC staff further proposes to remove interlock af ter P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording.
 
In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs as indicated:
In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs as indicated:
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 26


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 26 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this react or trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
 
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.
Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS)
Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS)
PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.
PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE.
Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)
Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Date report generated:
Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                         Page 27
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 27 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
In the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:
In the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:
In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading A.1 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading A.1 as indicated:
Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 as indicated:
Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
 
Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-tw o, w hile still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.
 
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading C.1 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading C.1 as indicated:
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 28
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 28 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading D.1 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading D.1 as indicated:
Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
 
Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or tw o source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
 
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 as indicated:
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux -
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading F.1 as indicated:
In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading F.1 as indicated:
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:
In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RTCOT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response...
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RT COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response...
 
In the same section, revise the third paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
In the same section, revise the third paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 29
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 29 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RTCOT.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RTCOT.
In the same section, revise the sixth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
In the same section, revise the sixth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features.
To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features.
In the same section, revise the ninth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
In the same section, revise the ninth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:
This The test frequency COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
This The test frequency COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
In the same section, revise the last two paragraphs as indicated for consistency with the Bases for SR 3.3.1.7 and SR 3.3.3.2 (see comment # 135):
In the same section, revise the last two paragraphs as indicated for consistency with the Bases for SR 3.3.1.7 and SR 3.3.3.2 (see comment # 135):
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux
            - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is
- High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is
            < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.
< P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.
 
During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, revise the first three paragraphs as indicated, and move the last Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                          Page 30


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 two sentences of paragraph 1 to the beginning of paragraph 2 for consistency with the Bases for STS SR 3.3.1.8:
In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, revise the first three paragraphs as indicated, and move the last
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 30 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
two sentences of paragraph 1 to the beginning of paragraph 2 for consistency with the Bases for STS SR 3.3.1.8:
 
SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
: 7.   (Internal # 126) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7, revise the opening sentence to state:
: 7. (Internal # 126) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7, revise the opening sentence to state:
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed This provides additional clarity. This is resolved by making the recommended change.
 
: 8.   (Internal # 135) The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.1.7, states that the Frequency is prior to startup. The TS SR 3.3.1.7 Frequency is actually prior to reactor startup. Change prior to startup to prior to reactor startup This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Bases discussion for SR 3.3.2.2 as shown in the resolution of comments for comment
The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed
    # 119 above.
 
: 9.   (Internal # 139) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases, correct the following typographical errors:
This provides additional clarity. This is resolved by making the recommended change.
: 8. (Internal # 135) The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.1.7, states that the Frequency is prior to startup. The TS SR 3.3.1.7 Frequency is actually prior to reactor startup. Change prior to startup to prior to reactor startup This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Bases discussion for SR 3.3.2.2 as shown in the resolution of comments for comment
# 119 above.
: 9. (Internal # 139) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases, correct the following typographical errors:
* On page 5, first paragraph fourth line, change MTS 3.3.3 to MTS 3.3.2; and
* On page 5, first paragraph fourth line, change MTS 3.3.3 to MTS 3.3.2; and
* On page 6, first paragraph on page, change (STS 3.3.3 Condition F) to (STS 3.3.2 Condition F)
* On page 6, first paragraph on page, change (STS 3.3.3 Condition F) to (STS 3.3.2 Condition F)
* On page 6, before the Changes to Condition table, change (MTS) 3.3.3 and as further changed, STS 3.3.3 to (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2 This is resolved by making the recommended GTST changes.
* On page 6, before the Changes to Condition table, change (MTS) 3.3.3 and as further changed, STS 3.3.3 to (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2
 
This is resolved by making the recommended GTST changes.
 
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                           Page 31
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 31 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
: 10. (Internal # 140) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases and in GTST Section VII under heading Technical Analysis, the discussion states the Required Action is changed to state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of SDM, consistent with TSTF-469-T. TSTF-469-T and the AP1000 STS markups state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that co uld result in a loss of requ ired SDM. Revise the discussions to add the word required to be co nsistent with the TS markups. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
: 11. (Internal # 141) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases in the Changes to Condition table, in row with STS 3.3.2 Condition E, Condition co lumn lists two Condition Q items. The second one of these items identifies the STS 3.3.2 Condition as E and the Additional DOC Changes as M02. The DOC change should be L07 just like the previous Condition Q item. Change M02 to L07. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
: 12. (Internal # 142 and 143) In GTST Section VII under the heading GTST Safety Evaluation the sixth paragraph states, Based on the DOC L01 changes, an RTCOT is not required by the TS. Therefore, the Section 1.1 RTCOT definition is deleted. The def inition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Replace sentences with Current section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted per TSU LAR DOC M01. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change (consistent with comment # 117):


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted f or a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev.4.
: 10. (Internal # 140) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases and in GTST Section VII under heading Technical Analysis, the discussion states the Required Action is changed to state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of SDM, consistent with TSTF-469-T. TSTF-469-T and the AP1000 STS markups state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. Revise the discussions to add the word required to be consistent with the TS markups. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
: 13. (Internal # 144) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, the penultimate paragraph, discusses other LCOs where the source range detectors are addressed. LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Saf ety Feature Actuation System (ESF AS) Actuation Logic - Operating, should be identified since Source Range Monitors are required by LCO 3.3.8 in MODE 2, 3, and 4. Add LCO 3.3.15 into the listing. In addition, the modifier PMS for power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases (see comment # 119).
: 11. (Internal # 141) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases in the Changes to Condition table, in row with STS 3.3.2 Condition E, Condition column lists two Condition Q items. The second one of these items identifies the STS 3.3.2 Condition as E and the Additional DOC Changes as M02. The DOC change should be L07 just like the previous Condition Q item. Change M02 to L07. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
: 12. (Internal # 142 and 143) In GTST Section VII under the heading GTST Safety Evaluation the sixth paragraph states, Based on the DOC L01 changes, an RTCOT is not required by the TS. Therefore, the Section 1.1 RTCOT definition is deleted. The definition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Replace sentences with Current section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted per TSU LAR DOC M01. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change (consistent with comment # 117):
The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev.4.
: 13. (Internal # 144) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, the penultimate paragraph, discusses other LCOs where the source range detectors are addressed. LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, should be identified since Source Range Monitors are required by LCO 3.3.8 in MODE 2, 3, and 4. Add LCO 3.3.15 into the listing. In addition, the modifier PMS for power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases (see comment # 119).
This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.
This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.
: 14. (Internal # 145) In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, the third paragraph, first sentence repeats a Note (i.e., provides a new description of the note), which is already described in the previous paragraph. Delete the first sentence of this paragraph. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.
: 14. (Internal # 145) In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, the third paragraph, first sentence repeats a Note (i.e., provides a new description of the note), which is already described in the previous paragraph. Delete the first sentence of this paragraph. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 32
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 32 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
NRC Final Approval Date: 6/29/ 2015


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 NRC Final Approval Date: 6/29/2015 NRC
NRC


==Contact:==
==Contact:==
C. Craig Harbuck United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission 301-415-3140 Craig.Harbuck@nrc.gov Date report generated:
C. Craig Harbuck United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission 301-415-3140 Craig.Harbuck@nrc.gov
Monday, June 29, 2015                                       Page 33
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 33 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 IX. Evaluator Comments for Consideration in Finalizing Technical Specifications and Bases None Date report generated:
IX. Evaluator Comments for Consideration in Finalizing Technical Specifications and Bases
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                            Page 34


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 X. References Used in GTST
None
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 34 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
X. References Used in GTST
: 1. AP1000 DCD, Revision 19, Section 16, Technical Specifications, June 2011 (ML11171A500).
: 1. AP1000 DCD, Revision 19, Section 16, Technical Specifications, June 2011 (ML11171A500).
: 2. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Technical Specifications Upgrade License Amendment Request, February 24, 2011 (ML12065A057).
: 2. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Technical Specifications Upgrade License Amendment Request, February 24, 2011 (ML12065A057).
: 3. NRC Safety Evaluation (SE) for Amendment No. 13 to Combined License (COL) No.
: 3. NRC Safety Evaluation (SE) for Amendment No. 13 to Combined License (COL) No.
NPF-91 for Vogtle Electric Generating Plant (VEGP) Unit 3, and Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 for VEGP Unit 4, September 9, 2013, ADAMS Package Accession No. ML13238A337, which contains:
NPF-91 for Vogtle Electric Generating Plant (VEGP) Unit 3, and Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 for VEGP Unit 4, September 9, 2013, ADAMS Package Accession No.
ML13238A355       Cover Letter - Issuance of License Amendment No. 13 for Vogtle Units 3 and 4 (LAR 12-002).
ML13238A337, which contains:
ML13238A359       Enclosure 1 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-91 ML13239A256       Enclosure 2 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 ML13239A284       Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13)
 
ML13239A287       Enclosure 4 - Safety Evaluation (SE), and Attachment 1 - Acronyms ML13239A288       SE Attachment 2 - Table A - Administrative Changes ML13239A319       SE Attachment 3 - Table M - More Restrictive Changes ML13239A333       SE Attachment 4 - Table R - Relocated Specifications ML13239A331       SE Attachment 5 - Table D - Detail Removed Changes ML13239A316       SE Attachment 6 - Table L - Less Restrictive Changes The following documents were subsequently issued to correct an administrative error in Enclosure 3:
ML13238A355 Cover Letter - Issuance of License Amendment No. 13 for Vogtle Units 3 and 4 (LAR 12- 002).
ML13277A616       Letter - Correction To The Attachment (Replacement Pages) - Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4-Issuance of Amendment Re:
ML13238A359 Enclosure 1 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-91 ML13239A256 Enclosure 2 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 ML13239A284 Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13)
Technical Specifications Upgrade (LAR 12-002) (TAC No. RP9402)
ML13239A287 Enclosure 4 - Safety Evaluation (SE), and Attachment 1 - Acronyms ML13239A288 SE Attachment 2 - Table A - Administrative Changes ML13239A319 SE Attachment 3 - Table M - More Restrictive Changes ML13239A333 SE Attachment 4 - Table R - Relocated Specifications ML13239A331 SE Attachment 5 - Table D - Detail Removed Changes ML13239A316 SE Attachment 6 - Table L - Less Restrictive Changes
ML13277A637       Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13) (corrected)
 
The following documents were subsequently issued to correct an administrative error in Enclosure 3:
 
ML13277A616 Letter - Correction To The Attachment (Replacement Pages) - Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4-Issuance of Amendment Re:
Technical Specifications Upgrade (LAR 12- 002) (TAC No. RP9402)
ML13277A637 Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13) (corrected)
: 4. TSTF-286, Revision 2, Define Operations Involving Positive Reactivity Additions.
: 4. TSTF-286, Revision 2, Define Operations Involving Positive Reactivity Additions.
: 5. TSTF-GG-05-01, Writer's Guide for Plant-Specific Improved Technical Specifications, June 2005.
: 5. TSTF-GG-05-01, W riter's Guide for Plant-Specific Improved Technical Specifications, June 2005.
: 6. RAI Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request (LAR) 12-002 for the Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 Combined Licenses, September 7, 2012 (ML12251A355).
: 6. RAI Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request (LAR) 12- 002 for the Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 Combined Licenses, September 7, 2012 (ML12251A355).
: 7. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Response to Request for Additional Information Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request LAR-12-002, ND-12-2015, October 04, 2012 (ML12286A363 and ML12286A360)
: 7. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Response to Request for Additional Information Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request LAR 002, ND 2015, October 04, 2012 (ML12286A363 and ML12286A360)
 
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                   Page 35
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 35 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
: 8. APOG-2014- 008, APOG (AP1000 Utilities) Comments on AP1000 Standardized Technical Specifications (STS) Generic Technical Specification Travelers (GTSTs), Docket ID NRC-2014- 0147, September 22, 2014 (ML14265A493).


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
: 8. APOG-2014-008, APOG (AP1000 Utilities) Comments on AP1000 Standardized Technical Specifications (STS) Generic Technical Specification Travelers (GTSTs), Docket ID NRC-2014-0147, September 22, 2014 (ML14265A493).
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                 Page 36
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 36 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
XI. MARKUP of the Applicable GTS Subsection for Preparation of the STS NUREG
 
The entire section of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST is presented next.
 
Changes to the Specifications and Bases are denoted as follows: Deleted portions are marked in strikethrough red font, and inserted portions in bold blue f ont.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 XI. MARKUP of the Applicable GTS Subsection for Preparation of the STS NUREG The entire section of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST is presented next.
Changes to the Specifications and Bases are denoted as follows: Deleted portions are marked in strikethrough red font, and inserted portions in bold blue font.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                   Page 37
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 37 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation LCO 3.3.2             Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
APPLICABILITY:         MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Reactor Trip breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
 
ACTIONS CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION               COMPLETION TIME A. One channel                 A.1     Place inoperable channel     2 hours inoperable in MODE 2.               in bypass or trip.
3.3 INSTRUMENTATION
B. Two channels                 B.1     Place one inoperable         2 hours inoperable in MODE 2.               channel in bypass.
 
AND B.2     Place one inoperable         2 hours channel in trip.
3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
CA. Required Action and         CA.1     Suspend operations           Immediately associated Completion               involving positive reactivity Time of Condition A or             additions that could result B not met One or two               in a loss of required SDM.
 
LCO 3.3.2 Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.
 
APPLICABILITY: MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Reactor Trip breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
 
ACTIONS
 
CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME
 
A. One channel A. 1 Place inoperable channel 2 hours inoperable in MODE 2. in bypass or trip.
 
B. Tw o channels B.1 Place one inoperable 2 hours inoperable in MODE 2. channel in bypass.
 
AN D
 
B.2 Place one inoperable 2 hours channel in trip.
 
CA. Required Action and CA.1 Suspend operations Immediately associated Completion involving positive reactivity Time of Condition A or additions that could result B not met One or two in a loss of required SDM.
Source Range Neutron Flux channels inoperable.
Source Range Neutron Flux channels inoperable.
AP1000 STS                                    3.3.2-1                      Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                Page 38


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 ACTIONS (continued)
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-1 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
CONDITION                REQUIRED ACTION                COMPLETION TIME DC. One or two channels  DC.1  Restore three of four        48 hours inoperable in MODE 3,          channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5.                      status.
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 38 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
OR C. 2  Open RTBs.                    49 hours D. Required Source        D.1  Suspend operations            Prior to increasing Range Neutron Flux          involving positive reactivity THERMAL POWER channel inoperable.          additions.                    to > P-6 AND D.2  Close unborated water        1 hour source isolation valves.
 
AND D.3  Perform SR 3.1.1.1.          1 hour AND Once per 12 hours thereafter E. Required Action and      E.1  Initiate action to fully      1 hour associated Completion        insert all rods.
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
Time of Condition D not met.                AND E.2  Place the Plant Control      1 hour System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
AP1000 STS                              3.3.2-2                      Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                             Page 39


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 ACTIONS (continued)
ACTIONS (continued)
CONDITION                               REQUIRED ACTION                           COMPLETION TIME FB. Three or more Source               FB.1     Open reactor trip breakers               Immediately Range Neutron Flux                           (RTBs).
 
CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME
 
DC. One or two channels DC.1 Restore three of four 48 hours inoperable in MODE 3, channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5. status.
 
OR
 
C. 2 Open RTBs. 49 hours
 
D. Required Source D.1 Suspend operations Prior to increasing Range Neutron Flux involving positive reactivity THERMAL POW ER channel inoperable. additions. to > P-6
 
AND
 
D.2 Close unborated water 1 hour source isolation valves.
 
AND
 
D.3 Perform SR 3.1.1.1. 1 hour
 
AND
 
Once per 12 hours thereafter
 
E. Required Action and E.1 Initiate action to fully 1 hour associated Completion insert all rods.
Time of Condition D not met. AN D
 
E.2 Place the Plant Control 1 hour System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
 
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-2 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 39 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME
 
FB. Three or more Source FB.1 Open reactor trip breakers Immediately Range Neutron Flux (RTBs).
channels inoperable.
channels inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                                   FREQUENCY SR 3.3.2.1         Perform CHANNEL CHECK.                                                     12 hours SR 3.3.2.2         -------------------------------NOTES-------------------------------       -------NOTE-------
 
: 1. This Surveillance shall include verification that                       Only required interlock P-6 is in its required state for existing                 when not unit conditions.                                                     performed within previous 92 days
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
: 1. Only required to be performed when not                               ----------------------
 
SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY
 
SR 3.3.2.1 Perform CHANNEL CHECK. 12 hours
 
SR 3.3.2.2 -------------------------------NOTES------------------------------- -------NOTE -------
: 1. This Surveillance shall include verification that Only required interlock P-6 is in its required state for existing when not unit conditions. performed within previous 92 days
: 1. Only required to be performed when not ----------------------
performed within previous 92 days.
performed within previous 92 days.
: 2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
: 2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program.                        Prior to reactor startup AND 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 AND 92 days thereafter AP1000 STS                                            3.3.2-3                                Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                                          Page 40


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program. Prior to reactor startup
SURVEILLANCE                                                 FREQUENCY SR 3.3.2.3         --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
 
AND
 
4 hours after reducing power below P-6
 
AND
 
92 days thereafter
 
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-3 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 40 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY
 
SR 3.3.2.3 --------------------------------NOTE------------------- -------------
Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with                           24 months Setpoint Program.
 
SR 3.3.2.4         --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with 24 months Setpoint Program.
 
SR 3.3.2.4 --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.
Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.
Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits.                                24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS AP1000 STS                                            3.3.2-4                              Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                                    Page 41


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation BASES BACKGROUND             A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.
Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits. 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS
APPLICABLE             The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all SAFETY                 AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which ANALYSES, LCO,         the RTBs are closed.
 
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-4 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 41 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION
 
B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
 
BASES
 
BACKGROUND A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.
 
APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all SAFETY AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which ANALYSES, LCO, the RTBs are closed.
and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)
and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)
Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint.
This reactor The trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor source range trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, AP1000 STS                                   B 3.3.2-1                         Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
This reactor The trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor source range trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore,
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 42
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-1 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 42 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
 
the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued) the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P -6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and t he Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.
 
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.
 
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted,
the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.
If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)
If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)
Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic -
Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic -
Shutdown. The requirements for the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
Shutdown. The requirements f or the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
AP1000 STS                                   B 3.3.2-2                         Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
 
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 43
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-2 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 43 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
ACTIONS                In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel channels as-found trip setting condition is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
A.1 Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
B.1 and B.2 Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate AP1000 STS                                  B 3.3.2-3                        Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 44


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
ACTIONS In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel channels as-found trip setting condition is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
 
A. 1
 
Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
 
B.1 and B.2
 
Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-3 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 44 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
C.1 Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.
D.1 Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
E.1 and E.2 Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
AP1000 STS                                  B 3.3.2-4                      Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                  Page 45


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
C.1
F.1 Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
 
A.1 Condition A applies to one or two Source Range Neutron Flux trip channels inoperable when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the PMS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions.
Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Ac t i on C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.
 
D.1
 
Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
 
E.1 and E.2
 
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Ac t i on E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-4 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 45 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
F.1
 
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
 
A.1
 
Condition A applies to one or two Source Range Neutron Flux trip channels inoperable when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the PMS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions.
With one or two of the four channels inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation.
With one or two of the four channels inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation.
With only two source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced and any actions that add positive reactivity to the core must be suspended immediately.
With only two source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced and any actions that add positive reactivity to the core must be suspended immediately.
B.1 Condition B applies to three inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup, or in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With three source range channels inoperable, the RTBs must be opened immediately. With the RTBs open, the core is in a more stable condition.
C.1 and C.2 Condition C applies to one or two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the PLS capable of rod withdrawal. With the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With one or two of the source range channels inoperable, 48 hours is allowed to restore three of the four channels to an OPERABLE status. If the channels cannot be returned to an OPERABLE status, 1 additional hour is allowed to open the RTBs. Once the RTBs are open, the core is in a AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-5                        Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 46


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES ACTIONS (continued) more stable condition and the unit enters Condition R. The allowance of 48 hours to restore the channel to OPERABLE status, and the additional hour to open the RTBs, are justified in Reference 2.
B.1
D.1, D.2, and D.3 Condition D applies when the required Source Range Neutron Flux channel is inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open. With the unit in this Condition, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. With the required source range channel inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation. In addition to suspension of positive reactivity additions, all valves that could add unborated water to the RCS must be closed within 1 hour as specified in LCO 3.9.2. The isolation of unborated water sources will preclude a boron dilution accident.
 
Condition B applies to three inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup, or in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith three source range channels inoperable, the RTBs must be opened immediately. W ith the RTBs open, the core is in a more stable condition.
 
C.1 and C.2
 
Condition C applies to one or two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the PLS capable of rod withdrawal. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith one or two of the source range channels inoperable, 48 hours is allowed to restore three of the four channels to an OPERABLE status. If the channels cannot be returned to an OPERABLE status, 1 additional hour is allowed to open the RTBs. Once the RTBs are open, the core is in a
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-5 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 46 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
more stable condition and the unit enters Condition R. The allowance of 48 hours to restore the channel to OPERABLE status, and the additional hour to open the RTBs, are justified in Reference 2.
 
D.1, D.2, and D.3
 
Condition D applies when the required Source Range Neutron Flux channel is inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open. W ith the unit in this Condition, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith the required source range channel inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation. In addition to suspension of positive reactivity additions, all valves that could add unborated water to the RCS must be closed within 1 hour as specified in LCO 3.9.2. The isolation of unborated water sources will preclude a boron dilution accident.
 
Also, the SDM must be verified within 1 hour and once every 12 hours thereafter as per SR 3.1.1.1, SDM verification. With no source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced. Verifying the SDM within 1 hour allows sufficient time to perform the calculations and determine that the SDM requirements are met. The SDM must also be verified once per 12 hours thereafter to ensure that the core reactivity has not changed. Required Action D.3 precludes any positive reactivity additions; therefore, core reactivity should not be increasing, and a 12 hour Frequency is adequate. The Completion Times of within 1 hour and once per 12 hours are based on operating experience in performing the Required Actions and the knowledge that unit conditions will change slowly.
Also, the SDM must be verified within 1 hour and once every 12 hours thereafter as per SR 3.1.1.1, SDM verification. With no source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced. Verifying the SDM within 1 hour allows sufficient time to perform the calculations and determine that the SDM requirements are met. The SDM must also be verified once per 12 hours thereafter to ensure that the core reactivity has not changed. Required Action D.3 precludes any positive reactivity additions; therefore, core reactivity should not be increasing, and a 12 hour Frequency is adequate. The Completion Times of within 1 hour and once per 12 hours are based on operating experience in performing the Required Actions and the knowledge that unit conditions will change slowly.
SURVEILLANCE          The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and RTCOT are performed in a manner REQUIREMENTS          that is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-6                        Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 47


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
SURVEILLANCE The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and RTCOT are performed in a manner REQUIREMENTS that is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate F S AR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be
SR 3.3.2.1 Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-6 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 47 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
 
SR 3.3.2.1
 
Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
 
Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.
Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.
The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.
The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.
SR 3.3.2.2 SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RTCOT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-7                          Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 48


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
SR 3.3.2.2
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RTCOT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-7 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 48 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
A RTCOT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.
A RTCOT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.
A test subsystem is provided with the PMS protection and safety monitoring system to aid the plant staff in performing the RTCOT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features. Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.
 
A test subsystem is provided with the PMS protection and safety monitoring system to aid the plant staff in performing the RT COT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features. Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.
 
For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.
For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.
Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.
Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.
To the extent possible, PMS protection and safety monitoring system functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The RTCOT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.
To the extent possible, PMS protection and safety monitoring system functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The RTCOT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.
If the RTCOT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the RTCOT can be performed using portable test equipment.
If the RTCOT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the RTCOT can be performed using portable test equipment.
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-8                        Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 49


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed w hen required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-8 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 49 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
The COT Surveillance Frequency This test frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
The COT Surveillance Frequency This test frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT )
and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note states that this test shall include verification that the P-6 interlock is in its required state for the existing unit condition. allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note states that this test shall include verification that the P-6 interlock is in its required state for the existing unit condition. allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the unit plant remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than four 4 hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-9                          Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                          Page 50


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) performed prior to the expiration of the four 4 hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function NIS source range instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four > 4 hours.
The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the unit plant remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and f our 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than four 4 hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-9 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 50 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
performed prior to the expiration of the four 4 hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function NIS source range instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four > 4 hours.
 
During the RTCOT, the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
During the RTCOT, the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
SR 3.3.2.3 A SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
 
SR 3.3.2.3
 
A SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.
 
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux source range neutron detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux source range neutron detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
AP1000 STS                                  B 3.3.2-10                        Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 51


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-10 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 51 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.
The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.
SR 3.3.2.4 This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.
 
For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR DCD Chapter 7 response time.
SR 3.3.2.4
 
This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.
 
For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FS AR DCD Chapter 7 response time.
Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-11                      Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 52


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-11 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 52 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.
Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.
Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.
Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.
SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.
REFERENCES             1. FSAR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.
 
REFERENCES 1. FS AR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.
: 2. APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
: 2. APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
: 2. APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.
: 2. AP P-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.
AP1000 STS                                   B 3.3.2-12                       Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
 
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 53
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-12 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 53 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
XII. Applicable STS Subsection After Incorporation of this GTSTs Modifications
 
The entire subsection of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST, following incorporation of the modifications, is presented next.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 XII. Applicable STS Subsection After Incorporation of this GTSTs Modifications The entire subsection of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST, following incorporation of the modifications, is presented next.
Date report generated:
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                 Page 54
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 54 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
 
3.3 INSTRUMENTATION
 
3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
 
LCO 3.3.2 Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation LCO 3.3.2              Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.
APPLICABILITY: MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
APPLICABILITY:         MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.
 
ACTIONS CONDITION                     REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME A. One channel inoperable       A.1     Place inoperable channel in   2 hours in MODE 2.                         bypass or trip.
ACTIONS
B. Two channels                 B.1     Place one inoperable           2 hours inoperable in MODE 2.               channel in bypass.
 
AND B.2     Place one inoperable           2 hours channel in trip.
CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME
C. Required Action and           C.1     Suspend positive reactivity   Immediately associated Completion               additions that could result in Time of Condition A or B           a loss of required SDM.
 
A. One channel inoperable A.1 Place inoperable channel in 2 hours in MODE 2. bypass or trip.
 
B. Two channels B.1 Place one inoperable 2 hours inoperable in MODE 2. channel in bypass.
 
AND
 
B.2 Place one inoperable 2 hours channel in trip.
 
C. Required Action and C.1 Suspend positive reactivity Immediately associated Completion additions that could result in Time of Condition A or B a loss of required SDM.
not met.
not met.
D. One or two channels          D.1    Restore three of four          48 hours inoperable in MODE 3,                channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5.                            status.
AP1000 STS                                    3.3.2-1                                  Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                Page 55


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 ACTIONS (continued)
D. One or two channels D.1 Restore three of four 48 hours inoperable in MODE 3, channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5. status.
CONDITION                  REQUIRED ACTION                  COMPLETION TIME E. Required Action and        E.1  Initiate action to fully insert 1 hour associated Completion          all rods.
Time of Condition D not met.                      AND E.2  Place the Plant Control        1 hour System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
F. Three or more channels     F.1   Open reactor trip breakers      Immediately inoperable.                      (RTBs).
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE                                  FREQUENCY SR 3.3.2.1        Perform CHANNEL CHECK.                              12 hours AP1000 STS                                3.3.2-2                                    Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                              Page 56


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-1 Rev. 0
SURVEILLANCE                                                 FREQUENCY SR 3.3.2.2         -------------------------------NOTES-------------------------------
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 55 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME
 
E. Required Action and E.1 Initiate action to fully insert 1 hour associated Completion all rods.
Time of Condition D not met. AND
 
E.2 Place the Plant Control 1 hour System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.
 
F. Three or more channels F.1 Open reactor trip breakers Immediately inoperable. (RTBs).
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
 
SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY
 
SR 3.3.2.1 Perform CHANNEL CHECK. 12 hours
 
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-2 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 56 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY
 
SR 3.3.2.2 -------------------------------NOTES-------------------------------
: 1. Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.
: 1. Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.
: 2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
: 2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program.                         Prior to reactor startup AND 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 AND 92 days thereafter SR 3.3.2.3         --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
 
Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program. Prior to reactor startup
 
AND
 
4 hours after reducing power below P-6
 
AND
 
92 days thereafter
 
SR 3.3.2.3 --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with                           24 months Setpoint Program.
 
SR 3.3.2.4         --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with 24 months Setpoint Program.
 
SR 3.3.2.4 --------------------------------NOTE--------------- -----------------
Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.
Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.
Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits.                              24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS AP1000 STS                                            3.3.2-3                                            Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                                    Page 57


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation BASES BACKGROUND             A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.
Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits. 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS
APPLICABLE             The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs SAFETY                 and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the ANALYSES, LCO,         RTBs are closed.
 
AP1000 STS 3.3.2-3 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 57 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION
 
B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation
 
BASES
 
BACKGROUND A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.
 
APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs SAFETY and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the ANALYSES, LCO, RTBs are closed.
and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)
and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)
Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.
The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.
Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.
AP1000 STS                                  B 3.3.2-1                                        Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 58


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-1 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 58 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)
 
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -
The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P -6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE.
High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.
In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.
If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron f lux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.
 
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
AP1000 STS                                  B 3.3.2-2                                      Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 59


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES ACTIONS               In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-2 Rev. 0
A.1 Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
 
B.1 and B.2 Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2.
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 59 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
ACTIONS In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.
 
A.1
 
Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. W ith one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
 
B.1 and B.2
 
Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2.
With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-3                                        Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                          Page 60


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES ACTIONS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-3 Rev. 0
C.1 Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.
 
D.1 Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
Date report generated:
E.1 and E.2 Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 60 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
F.1 Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
 
AP1000 STS                                   B 3.3.2-4                                       Rev. 0 Date report generated:
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                       Page 61
 
BASES
 
ACTIONS (continued)
 
C.1
 
Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.
 
D.1
 
Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. W ith one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours. The Completion Time of 48 hours to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.
 
E.1 and E.2
 
Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
 
F.1
 
Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. W ith three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-4 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 61 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and COT are performed in a manner that REQUIREMENTS is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
 
SR 3.3.2.1
 
Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE          The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and COT are performed in a manner that REQUIREMENTS          is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
SR 3.3.2.1 Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.
Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.
The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.
The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-5                                      Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                        Page 62


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-5 Rev. 0
SR 3.3.2.2 SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance),
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 62 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
SR 3.3.2.2
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as -left tolerance),
and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
A COT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.
A COT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.
A test subsystem is provided with the PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the COT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features.
A test subsystem is provided with the PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the COT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features.
Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.
Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.
For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.
For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.
Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.
Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.
To the extent possible, PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The COT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.
To the extent possible, PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The COT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-6                                      Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 63


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-6 Rev. 0
If the COT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the COT can be performed using portable test equipment.
 
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function.
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 63 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
If the COT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the COT can be perf ormed using portable test equipment.
 
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations perf ormed f or the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function.
When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
The COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
The COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.
 
SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours after entry into MODE 3.
The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-7                                      Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 64


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of 92 days thereafter applies if the unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure that the Source Range Neutron Flux -
The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-7 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 64 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of 92 days thereafter applies if the unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and 4 hours after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than f our hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the f our hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure that the Source Range Neutron Flux -
High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four hours.
High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four hours.
During the COT, the PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
During the COT, the PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.
SR 3.3.2.3 A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
 
SR 3.3.2.3
 
A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
 
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP.
If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.
AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-8                                        Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                          Page 65


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-8 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 65 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP.
Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP.
If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. W hen an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.
 
The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.
The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.
SR 3.3.2.4 This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.
 
SR 3.3.2.4
 
This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.
 
For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time.
For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time.
Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.
Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic AP1000 STS                                    B 3.3.2-9                                    Rev. 0 Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                      Page 66


GTST AP1000-O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1 RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2 BASES SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued) response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.
Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic
 
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-9 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 66 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1
 
RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2
 
BASES
 
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)
 
response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.
 
Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.
Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.
SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.
SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.
REFERENCES             1. FSAR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.
 
REFERENCES 1. FSAR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.
: 2. APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.
: 2. APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.
AP1000 STS                                   B 3.3.2-10                                     Rev. 0 Date report generated:
 
Monday, June 29, 2015                                                                     Page 67}}
AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-10 Rev. 0
 
Date report generated:
Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 67}}

Revision as of 04:44, 16 November 2024

Changes Related to AP1000 Gts Subsection 3.3.2, RTS Source Range Instrumentation
ML22240A037
Person / Time
Issue date: 06/29/2015
From:
NRC/NRR/DSS/STSB
To:
Craig Harbuck NRR/DSS 301-415-3140
Shared Package
ML22240A001 List: ... further results
References
Download: ML22240A037 (67)


Text

GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Advanced Passive 1000 (AP1000)

Generic Technical Specification Traveler (GTST)

Title:

Changes Related to LCO 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

I. Technical Specifications Task Force (TSTF) Travelers, Approved Since Revision 2 of STS NUREG-1431, and Used to Develop this GTST

TSTF Number and

Title:

TSTF-425-A, Rev 3, Relocate Surveillance Frequencies to Licensee Control - RITSTF Initiative 5b TSTF-469-T, Rev 0, Correct Action to Suspend Positive Reactivity Additions TSTF-519-T, Rev 0, Increase Standardization in Condition and Required Action Notes

STS NUREGs Affected:

TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: NUREGs 1430, 1431, 1432, 1433, and 1434 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1431 and 1432 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG 1430 and 1431

NRC Approval Date:

TSTF-425-A, Rev. 3: 06-Jul-09 TSTF-469-T, Rev 0: 22-Apr-04 TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: 16-Oct-09 (TSTF Review)

TSTF Classification:

TSTF-425-A, Rev 3: Technical Change TSTF-469-T, Rev 1: Editorial Change TSTF-519-T, Rev 0: NUREG Only Change

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 1 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

II. Reference Combined License (RCOL) Standard Departures (Std. Dep.), RCOL COL Items, and RCOL Plant -Specific Technical Specifications (PTS) Changes Used to Develop this GTST

RCOL Std. Dep. Number and

Title:

There are no Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (Vogtle or VEGP) departures applicable to GTS 3.3.1.

RCOL COL Item Number and

Title:

There are no Vogtle COL items applicable to GTS 3.3.1.

RCOL PTS Change Number and

Title:

The VEGP License Amendment Request (LAR) proposed the following changes to the initial version of the PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP LAR). These changes include Administrative Changes (A), Detail Removed Changes (D), Less Restrictive Changes (L), and More Restrictive Changes (M). These changes are discussed in Sections VI and VII of this GTST.

VEGP LAR DOC A024: Ref ormat of GTS 3.3.1 into Seven Parts; 3.3.1 through 3.3.7; note that this maps GTS 3.3.1 requirements into interim A024-modified TS (MTS) Subsection 3.3.2, to which the other changes are applied.

VEGP LAR DOC A026: SR Note Change VEGP LAR DOC M01: Deletion of Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) Definition VEGP LAR DOC M02: Provision for Two or More Inoperable Divisions or Channels VEGP LAR DOC L07: Certain TS Required Actions Requiring the Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) to be Opened Are Revised into Two Required Actions VEGP LAR DOC L09: Revise Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 and related Conditions VEGP LAR DOC L10: Delete PTS 3.3.1 Function 16, Interlocks VEGP LAR DOC L11: Delete Table 3.3.1-1 Function 5 third row and associated references

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 2 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

III. Comments on Relations Among TSTFs, RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Items, and RCOL PTS Changes

This section discusses the considered changes that are: (1) applicable to operating reactor designs, but not to the AP1000 design; (2) already incorporated in the GTS; or (3) superseded by another change.

TSTF-425-A deferred for future consideration.

TSTF-519-T has already been incorporated into the AP1000 GTS regarding the Writer's Guide for Improved Standard Technical Specifications (Reference 4) placement of Notes in TS Actions tables.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 3 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

IV. Additional Changes Proposed as Part of this GTST (modifications proposed by NRC staff and/or clear editorial changes or deviations identified by preparer of GTST)

Uniformly use:

  • Power Range Neutron Flux,
  • Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
  • Source Range Neutron Flux

in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors.

Insert as-left in SR phrases within the allowed as-left tolerance. (NRC Staff Comment)

Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.

Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies.

APOG Recommended Changes to Improve the Bases

For added clarity, revise the opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 to state:

The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed.

Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier. (DOC A003)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 4 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

V. Applicability

Affected Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:

Section 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

Changes to the Generic Technical Specifications and Bases:

GTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is reformatted by DOC A024 into multiple Specifications including interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation. The reformatting relocates GTS 3.3.1 Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, into MTS 3.3.2 as part of the LCO statement. The MTS format is depicted in Section XI of this GTST as the reference case in the markup of the GTS instrumentation requirements for the source range instrumentation.

MTS 3.3.2 LCO Title GTS 3.3.1 Function

Reactor Trip System (RTS) 5. Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint Source Range Instrumentation

References 2, 3, and 6 provide details showing the correspondence of GTS 3.3.1 Functions and STS 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 Functions.

The Applicability Statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 is revised to Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. from Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. This avoids undesirable plant secondary effects due to interlock actuation. (DOC L07)

GTS 3.3.1 Conditions I, J, Q and R are reordered and relabeled as AP1000 MTS 3.3.2 Conditions A, B, C and D. (DOC A024)

GTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, third row is deleted (including footnote (e)). This eliminates the need for MTS Condition D. The requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability. (DOC L11)

GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d), Below the P-6 (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux) interlocks, applies to operation in MODE 2 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (d) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODE 2. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a), W ith Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal, and footnote (e), W ith RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication, applies to operation in MODES 3, 4, and 5 for source range instrumentation. GTS Table 3.3.1-1 footnote (a) is incorporated into the MTS 3.3.3 LCO Applicability statement for MODES 3, 4, and 5 and footnote (e) is eliminated. (DOC A024 and DOC L11)

STS 3.3.2 Conditions A and B are added to provide Actions to place inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip in MODE 2. (DOC L09)

MTS 3.3.2 Condition A statement becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition C and is revised to reference new Actions A and B. (editorial result of DOC L09)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 5 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

MTS 3.3.2 Condition B (STS 3.3.2 Condition F) is revised to address three or more inoperable channels. Otherwise, LCO 3.0.3 would apply when the LCO is not met and the associated Actions are not met or an associated Action is not provided. (DOC M02)

MTS 3.3.2 Condition A Action statement A.1 becomes STS 3.3.2 Action statement C.1 and is revised to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption. (TSTF-469-T)

MTS 3.3.2 Condition C becomes STS 3.3.2 Condition D. The requirement to open RTBs associated with proposed MTS 3.3.2 Action Statement C.2 is replaced by two Actions to initiate action to fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. This provides flexibility to avoid potentially undesirable effects of opening RTBs and initiating certain interlocks. (DOC L07 and editorial result of DOC L09)

MTS 3.3.2 Condition D (GTS 3.3.1 Condition R) is deleted. This is related to the elimination of Function 5, third row requirement associated with GTS 3.3.1 Table 3.3.1-1. (DOC L11)

GTS SR 3.3.1.1 is retained and renumbered as MTS SR 3.3.2.1. GTS SR 3.3.1.8 and 3.3.1.9 are combined and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.2. GTS SR 3.3.1.11 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.3. GTS SR 3.3.1.13 is retained and renumbered as STS SR 3.3.2.4. No Function Table is required. The MTS format is depicted as the reference case in the attached markup. (DOC A024)

MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is deleted. As discussed in the Bases, the interlock operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. (DOC L10)

MTS SR 3.3.2.2 is revised from Perf orm RTCOT... to Perform COT... and Frequency Note is repositioned as a Surveillance Note, replacing the PTS Surveillance Note. The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. NUREG-1431 specifies the COT for similar Functions. The Note relocation is per the Writer's Guide (Reference 5). (DOC M01 and DOC A026)

The Bases are revised to reflect these changes.

The following tables are provided as an aid to tracking the various changes to GTS 3.3.1 Conditions, Required Actions, Functions, Applicability Footnotes, and Surveillance Requirements that result in interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2.

Changes to Conditions

GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional Condition Condition Condition Addressing the Listed Condition DOC Changes

--- --- A --- L09

--- --- B --- L09 A 3.3.1 ---

B 3.3.5 ---

C 3.3.5 ---

D 3.3.1 ---

E 3.3.1 ---

F 3.3.3 ---

G 3.3.3 ---

H 3.3.3 ---

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 6 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional Condition Condition Condition Addressing the Listed Condition DOC Changes I A C --- L09 J B F --- M02 K 3.3.1 ---

L 3.3.4, 3.3.6 ---

M 3.3.1 ---

N 3.3.7 ---

O 3.3.7 ---

P 3.3.4, 3.3.6 ---

Q C D GTS Condition Q split into 2 Conditions L07 Q --- E --- L07 R D --- Deleted L11

Changes to Functions


Function [Modes(footnote)] ----------- STS 3.3.2 Other STS Subsections Additional GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 Conditions and Additional Changes DOC Changes 5 [2(d)] LCO 3.3.2 LCO 3.3.2 A, B --- ---

5 [3(a),4(a),5(a)] LCO 3.3.2 LCO 3.3.2 C, D, E, F --- ---

5 [3(e),4(e),5(e)] LCO 3.3.2 --- --- Deleted L11

Changes to Applicability Footnotes

GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS Subsections Also Additional Changes Footnote Footnote Footnote Function Addressing Listed footnote DOC Number a -----LCO Applicability ----- --- 3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.3.6, 3.3.7 L07 d -----LCO Applicability ----- --- 3.3.3 ---

e --- Deleted --- --- L11

Changes to Surveillance Requirements

GTS 3.3.1 MTS 3.3.2 STS 3.3.2 STS Subsections Also Example Surveillance No.

SR SR SR Addressing the Listed SR Surveillance Description 3.3.1.1 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.1 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.1 CHANNEL CHECK

3.3.1.2 3.3.1 3.3.1.2 Compare calorimetric heat balance to NI channel output

3.3.1.3 3.3.1 3.3.1.3 Compare calorimetric heat balance to delta-T power calculation

3.3.1.4 3.3.1 3.3.1.4 Compare incore detector measurement to NI AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE

3.3.1.5 3.3.1 3.3.1.5 Calibrate excore channels

3.3.1.6 3.3.7 3.3.7.1 Perform TADOT

3.3.1.7 3.3.4, 3.3.6 3.3.4.1 ACTUATION LOGIC TEST

3.3.1.8 3.3.3.2 3.3.3.2 3.3.1 3.3.1.6 Perform COT

3.3.1.9 3.3.2.2 3.3.2.2 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.7 Perform COT

3.3.1.10 3.3.1 3.3.1.8 CHANNEL CALIBRATION

3.3.1.11 3.3.2.3 3.3.2.3 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.9 CHANNEL CALIBRATION

3.3.1.12 3.3.1, 3.3.5 3.3.1.10 Perform TADOT

3.3.1.13 3.3.2.4 3.3.2.4 3.3.1, 3.3.3 3.3.1.11 Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to provide additional clarity. (APOG Comment)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 7 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

The nomenclature for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, Neutron Flux detectors is revised for consistency throughout the Bases. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)

The word interlock is removed af ter P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording. (NRC Staff Comment)

The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to provide consistency and clarity. (NRC Staff Comment)

The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in ref erences to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)

Reference 2 in the Bases is revised to the correct citation. (Evaluation Comment)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 8 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

VI. Traveler Information

Description of TSTF changes:

Required Actions which prohibit positive reactivity additions are corrected to prohibit positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The existing Required Actions do not accomplish the purpose as described in the Bases.

Rationale for TSTF changes:

The proposed Required Actions will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Actions, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing actions.

The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The proposed Required Actions will protect this assumption.

Description of changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:

The Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 (VEGP) technical specifications upgrade (TSU) License Amendment Request (VEGP TSU LAR) (Reference 2) proposed changes to the initial version of the VEGP PTS (referred to as the current TS by the VEGP TSU LAR). As detailed in VEGP TSU LAR Enclosure 1, administrative change number 24 (DOC A024) reformats PTS 3.3.1 into multiple Specifications as follows:

Since PTS 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation, is identical to GTS 3.3.1, it is appropriate for this GTST to consider the proposed changes to PTS 3.3.1 as changes to GTS 3.3.1 for incorporation in AP1000 STS 3.3.2. DOC A024 is extensive, but retains the intention of PTS 3.3.1 while improving operational use of the TS. The numerous Functions, Conditions and extensive bases discussion associated with PTS 3.3.1 are repackaged into seven smaller parts. Therefore, the changes implemented by DOC A024 are presented in the attached Subsection 3.3.2 markup, in Section XI of this GTST, as the clean starting point for this GTST and are identified as interim A024-modified TS (MTS) 3.3.2. The specific details of the ref ormatting for MTS 3.3.2 can be found in VEGP TSU LAR (Reference 2), in Enclosure 2 (markup) and Enclosure 4 (clean). The NRC staff safety evaluation regarding DOC A024 can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs in Reference 6 and the Southern Nuclear Operating Company RAI Response in Reference 7.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 9 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

DOC A026 moves the proposed MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Frequency Note Only required when not performed within previous 92 days to replace the PTS Surveillance Note. The new Surveillance Note states Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.

DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requirements from Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program, to Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program.

DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable.

DOC L07 revises the Action to open the RTBs into a two-step process to initiate action to fully insert all rods, and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.

DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation.

DOC L10 removes the MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note regarding verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions.

DOC L11 deletes MTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux High Setpoint, third row for that function including applicability set 3(e),4(e),5(e) and associated references to Required Channel, Condition, and Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e); and PTS Action R.

A more detailed description of the changes by each of the above DOCs can be found in Reference 2, VEGP TSU LAR in Enclosure 1; the NRC staff safety evaluation can be found in Reference 3, VEGP LAR SER. The VEGP TSU LAR was modified in response to NRC staff RAIs (Reference 5) by Southern Nuclear Operating Companys RAI Response in Reference 6.

Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes:

The reformatting per DOC A024, except where addressed in other DOCs, addresses inconsistencies in formatting and approach between PTS 3.3.1 and PTS 3.3.2, respectively.

Simplification and clarification are proposed for each Specification. In breaking down each PTS Specification into specific subsets of the Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) function, improved human factored operator usability results.

These improvements also reflect the general approach currently in use in the Improved Standard Technical Specifications (STS) for Babcock and W ilcox Plants, NUREG -1430, Rev. 4.

That is to separate the functions for [sensor] instrumentation, Manual Actuation, Trip/Actuation Logic, and Trip Actuation Devices (e.g., Reactor Trip Breakers (RTBs)) into separate Specification subsections. Furthermore, the Actions for some ESFAS Functions generally involve a more complex presentation than needed for other Functions, such that simple common Actions are not reasonable. Such Functions are also provided with separate Specification subsections.

W hen TS instrument function tables are utilized to reference Actions, the generally preferred format of the Actions for an instrumentation Specification in NUREG-1430 is to provide the initial Actions that would be common to all of the specified functions (typically for bypassing and/or tripping one or two inoperable channels), then the default Action would direct consulting the function table for follow-on Actions applicable to the specific affected function. These follow-up Actions generally reflect the actions to exit the Applicability for that function.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 10 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

This format also allows splitting the default Actions from the initial preferred actions. This general approach is the standard format for other Specifications and for Instrumentation Specifications for other vendors Improved STS.

DOC A026 is consistent with the TS Writer's Guide found in reference 5. DOC L10 notes that the GTS SR 3.3.1.9 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. GTS SR 3.3.1.9 is proposed as MTS SR 3.3.2.2. The requirement for verification that interlocks P-6 and P-10 are in their required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.

DOC M01 notes that the definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints that are required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The PTS Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. The COT definition explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, because the definition of COT more closely aligns with the RTCOT test description provided in the bases, the COT is specified instead of an RTCOT. The RTCOT definition is deleted from TS Section 1.1. A COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps. The changes are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431.

DOC M02 directly provides for the default Actions of LCO 3.0.3 without allowing for the additional hour that LCO 3.0.3 permits prior to initiating shutdown. This provides clarity for the operator and is more restrictive than LCO 3.0.3.

DOC L07 notes that when the RTBs are opened, certain other interlocks can be initiated. The initiation of the associated interlocks may have an undesirable secondary effect on the ease of operation of the plant such as the initiation of the P -4 interlock, which, in the event of low RCS temperature, can result in isolation of main feedwater to the steam generators.

DOC L09 places up to two inoperable channels in bypass or trip. In MODE 2, this allows continued operation and flexibility to continue a power ascension. Otherwise, further positive reactivity additions are not allowed per proposed MTS Action A.

DOC L10 notes that Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability. Interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or initiate an ESFAS function, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS.

Per DOC L11, the Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3, 4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in the PTS Applicability Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux channels for reactor trip functions to be Operable. As such, this requirement is inappropriately placed in the Specification requiring Reactor Trip System operability.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 11 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Description of additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST:

The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised to state:

The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed. (APOG Comment)

The modifier PMS is deleted for Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, detectors throughout the Bases. In addition, references to these three detector types are uniformly changed to:

  • Power Range Neutron Flux,
  • Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
  • Source Range Neutron Flux

in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. (APOG Comment and NRC Staff Edit)

The second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs in the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 are revised to state:

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.

The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 12 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or by pass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.

In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii). (NRC Staff Comment)

The first paragraph in the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 is revised to state:

In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading A.1 is revised to state:

Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 13 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, w hile still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 is revised to state:

Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.

(NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading C.1 is revised to state:

Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading D.1 is revised to state:

Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 is revised to state:

Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 14 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the paragraph under the heading F.1 is revised to state:

Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately. (NRC Staff Comment)

The first paragraph in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, is revised to state:

SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RT COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response... (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the third paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:

A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RT COT. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the sixth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:

To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the ninth paragraph, first sentence is revised to state:

This The test frequency C OT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure. (NRC Staff Comment)

In the same section, the last two paragraphs are revised to state:

The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 15 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance.

The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.

During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass. (NRC Staff Comment)

The first three paragraphs in the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, are revised to state:

SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.

The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.

(NRC Staff Comment)

The acronym FSAR is added to modify Section and Chapter in references to the FSAR throughout the Bases. (DOC A003) (APOG Comment)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 16 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta -T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. (Evaluation Comment)

Rationale for additional changes proposed by NRC staff/preparer of GTST :

The opening sentence of the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7 is revised for additional clarity.

The Bases modifier PMS f or Power Range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range detectors is unnecessary and inconsistent with other PMS instruments. The Bases references to all these detector types are standardized for consistency.

The non-technical change to the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.2.2 provides clarity.

Since Bases references to FSAR Sections and Chapters are to an external document, it is appropriate to include the FSAR modifier.

Reference 2 in the Bases is revised because OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1. Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. The reference citation is revised to correctly reflect the citation.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 17 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

VII. GTST Safety Evaluation

Technical Analysis:

TSTF-469-T revises MTS Action A.1 to Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM. The Required Action will prohibit activities which could result in a loss of required SDM. That is consistent with the intent of the existing Required Action, but eliminates the inconsistencies in the existing action. The accident analyses assume that events are initiated with the required SDM present. The Required Action will protect this assumption.

DOC M01 revises MTS SR 3.3.2.2 description to state Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program, in place of Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program. PTS Section 1.1 defines a Reactor Trip Channel Operational Test (RTCOT) as A RTCOT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the reactor trip channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of the required interlock and/or trip functions. The RTCOT may be performed by means of a series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps so that the entire channel is tested from the signal conditioner through the trip logic.

The STS Section 1.1 definition for Channel Operational Test (COT) per reference 2, DOC A001, states A COT shall be the injection of a simulated or actual signal into the channel as close to the sensor as practicable to verify OPERABILITY of all devices in the channel required for channel OPERABILITY. The COT shall include adjustments, as necessary, of the required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The COT may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total channel steps.

MTS SR 3.3.2.2 requires an RTCOT, in accordance with the Setpoint Program, to be performed on each TS required automatic protection instrumentation Function. Each Function requiring performance of an RTCOT by MTS SR 3.3.2.2 also requires performance of a Channel Calibration by MTS SR 3.3.2.3. Therefore, the Functions referencing MTS SR 3.3.2.2 contain adjustable devices.

The definition of RTCOT does not explicitly require adjustments of required alarm, interlock, and trip setpoints required for channel OPERABILITY such that the setpoints are within the necessary range and accuracy. The Bases associated with the RTCOT describe these adjustments, but the Bases are intended to clarify, not provide additional requirements. A COT explicitly requires these adjustments. Therefore, the definition of a COT more closely aligns with the description of the testing provided in the Bases for MTS SR 3.3.2.2. Use of COT for this SR is consistent with similar testing specified in NUREG-1431, TS 3.3.1. Use of COT is also consistent with testing performed on other instrumentation specified in the PTS.

The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4.

DOC M02 addresses the fact that MTS 3.3.2, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation, does not specify Actions for inoperability of more than two inoperable source range channels. This results in entry into LCO 3.0.3 when three or more channels are inoperable. GTS LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, and states:

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 18 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> to place the unit, as applicable,

a. MODE 3 within 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br />; and
b. MODE 4 within 13 hours1.50463e-4 days <br />0.00361 hours <br />2.149471e-5 weeks <br />4.9465e-6 months <br />; and
c. MODE 5 within 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br />.

GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 Functions with applicability statements that include MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, generally have no Actions specified for addressing a loss of function condition, such as when all required channels are inoperable. Upon discovery of such a condition, LCO 3.0.3 would apply.

The intent of LCO 3.0.3 (as stated in the TS Bases) is to impose time limits for placing the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition when operation cannot be maintained within the limits for safe operation as defined by the LCO and its ACTIONS.

The Actions for inoperable RTS and ESFAS instrumentation provide restoration time and/or compensatory action allowances (e.g., place the inoperable channel in trip); but only for inoperability of some of the channels (e.g., 1 or 2 out of 4 required channels, typically). If these restoration and/or compensatory actions cannot be met in the required time, default actions are provided, which are designed to place the unit in a safe MODE or other specified condition -

typically, actions that result in exiting the Applicability for that Function.

The shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 are typical of default actions throughout the TS that direct plant shutdown to exit the Applicability, with the exception that LCO 3.0.3 includes an additional 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> before the shutdown is required to be initiated.

The revisions described in DOC M02 address multiple-channel inoperability. The revisions will immediately impose the default Actions for that Function - without allowance for the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> delay that is provided in LCO 3.0.3. Furthermore, the Function-specific def ault actions (currently, or proposed to be, specified for some Functions) impose requirements intended to establish safe operation that are not necessarily required by LCO 3.0.3. Since each Function-specific default action is specifically considering that Functions safety-basis, such default actions necessarily result in more appropriate actions than the general default actions of LCO 3.0.3. Specifically, the Actions for each new Condition associated with DOC M02 for RTS and ESFAS Functions applicable in MODES1, 2, 3, or 4, are compared to LCO 3.0.3, and in each case, the new Actions are equivalent to or more restrictive than the actions of LCO 3.0.3.

STS 3.3.2 Condition F leads to a default action to exit the LCO Applicability immediately, which is more restrictive than the time allowed by LCO 3.0.3. These actions, which are introduced by DOC L07, as discussed below, are not found in LCO 3.0.3.

GTS 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 actions do not specify conditions that explicitly address multiple inoperable channels (that is, more than two inoperable channels or divisions, in most cases), and therefore default to LCO 3.0.3. In each instance, the proposed actions to address these conditions are more restrictive than the LCO 3.0.3 actions because completion times for reaching lower operational modes are shorter by 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. In addition, Function-specific actions, where specified, are more appropriate for the affected Function than the unit-shutdown actions of LCO 3.0.3 alone. Therefore, the changes specified by DOC M02 do not introduce any adverse impact on public health and safety.

Each of the PTS 3.3.1 required actions to open the reactor trip breakers (RTBs) is intended to ensure that control rods cannot be withdrawn thereby eliminating the possibility for control rod related positive reactivity additions and associated heat input into the reactor coolant.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 19 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Additionally, all control rods are inserted by opening the RTBs. Therefore, replacing each required action to open RTBs with the two actions, which require initiating action to fully insert all rods and placing the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal, maintains the intent of the PTS action requirements. DOC L07 replaces the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and ensuring all rods are inserted while maintaining the requirement for establishing the plant conditions equivalent to opening the RTBs. The revised actions still ensure rod withdrawal is precluded and all rods are inserted; therefore, the detail to open the RTBs is not required to be in the TS to provide adequate protection of the public health and saf ety.

To ensure that when the revised required actions are taken the unit is removed from the operational modes or other specified conditions in the Specifications Applicability, conforming revisions to the Applicability statements are made. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs closed is the condition of Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal. However, since rods could have been withdrawn prior to making the Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal, the revised Specifications include the additional condition of or one or more rods not fully inserted. This change also aligns with the required actions to both fully insert all rods and place the Plant Control System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal. The equivalent condition to the PTS Applicability statements that include RTBs open is the condition of Plant Control System incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted.

Removing the specific method of precluding rod withdrawal and establishing all rods inserted, and defining this condition solely in terms of the RTB status, from the TS is acceptable because this type of information is not necessary to be included to provide adequate protection of public health and safety. AP1000 STS 3.3.2 retains requirements to ensure that control rod withdrawal is prohibited and all rods are inserted, when required. DOC L07 is designated as a less restrictive change because one specific method for meeting the intended TS requirements is being removed from the TS, and replaced with actions to allow using alternate methods to establish the equivalent operational conditions.

DOC L09 allows for placing inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip thereby allowing continued operation. GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action I.1 ( Suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions ), for one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable in Mode 2, restricts power ascension. The VEGP LAR DOC L09 change adding STS 3.3.2 Actions A and B for these conditions requires placing the inoperable channels in bypass and/or trip. Completing these Required Actions allows continued operation and the flexibility to continue power ascension. This is a less restrictive change.

As summarized in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Table 7.2-2, Reactor Trips, each automatic RTS function is provided with 4 channels, with division trip logic of 2-out-of-f our ( 2/4 )

and similar bypass logic and capability. This bypass capability is also described in the TS Bases:

The use of four channels for protection functions is based on a minimum of two channels being required for a trip or actuation, one channel in test or bypass, and a single failure on the remaining channel. The signal selector algorithm in the Plant Control System (PLS) will function with only three channels. This includes two channels properly functioning and one channel having a single failure. For protection channels providing data to the control system, the fourth channel permits one channel to be in test or bypass. Minimum requirements for protection and control are achieved with only three channels OPERABLE. The fourth channel is provided to increase plant availability, and permits the plant to run for an indefinite time with a single channel out of service.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 20 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Furthermore, the RTS TS Bases for Function 5 specifically describe this capability for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function: This same discussion appears in other automatic RTS Function Bases.

Four channels are provided to permit one channel in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this trip Function.

The requirement to bypass and/or trip one and two inoperable automatic channels is applicable to most other automatic channels as provided in GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Actions E, F, and K. These Actions have the same provisions for tripping and/or bypassing inoperable channels. Currently, with one or two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) For two inoperable channels, with one channel bypassed and one channel tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion.

Therefore, the change to provide Actions to bypass or trip one inoperable channel and bypass one channel and trip one channel for two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels is consistent with the design and consistent with the intent as described in the TS Bases for these Functions. Based on the Completion Times for AP1000 GTS 3.3.1 Action F, applicable to Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels, bypassing and/or tripping within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> is provided for the STS 3.3.2, Actions A and B. Since RTS trip capability remains with one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, the additional 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed by Actions A and B do not have any significant impact on safety. The current action in the GTS/PTS to suspend all operations involving positive reactivity additions unless all four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are Operable is overly restrictive given RTS trip capability remains and that the safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux-High reactor trip Function, as stated in the Bases.

The DOC L09 change results in closer alignment with Actions for other automatic RTS Functions. The actions continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis such as preserving single-failure criterion for indefinite operations. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.

DOC L10 removes Function 12, Reactor Trip System Interlocks (P-6, P-10, and P-11), from MTS 3.3.1, Table 3.3.1-1. RTS interlocks are provided to ensure reactor trip system instrumentation and actuation Functions are in the correct configuration for the current plant status. They back up operator actions to ensure protection system Functions are not blocked during plant conditions in which the safety analysis assumes the Functions are Operable.

The interlocks, as separate RTS and ESFAS Functions are removed from the GTS and the associated action requirements are deleted. Interlock Operability is adequately addressed by each supported Functions requirement to be Operable and the requirement for reactor trip logic and ESF actuation logic operability.

For these supported RTS and ESFAS instrumentation and actuation Functions to be Operable, the associated RTS and ESFAS interlock functions would have to be in the required state as a support feature for Operability. These RTS and ESFAS interlock functions do not directly trip the reactor or actuate ESFAS, and as such are removed from the actuation instrumentation listing in TS. The role of the interlocks, and their support for the operability of RTS trip and ESFAS

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 21 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

actuation Functions, are described in the TS Bases, as well as in Final Safety Analysis Report (FSAR) Chapter 7, Instrumentation and Controls.

Furthermore, each RTS trip and ESFAS actuation Function is required operable during the stated TS Applicability. The Applicability for certain trip or actuation Functions is based on transitioning above or below an interlock; while other Functions are not directly supported by an interlock. For Functions supported by an interlock, while operating within the TS required Applicability for that Function, its associated supporting interlock is not required to automatically change state. The interlock status must be established in conjunction with assuring supported Functions operability prior to entering the specified Applicability. In addition, LCO 3.0.4 requires the operators to ensure RTS trip and ESFAS operability prior to entering their specified Applicability. These TS requirements remain in effect and impose the necessary operability requirements related to the removed interlock Functions. As such, interlocks are adequately addressed by each related Functions requirement to be operable and the requirement for actuation logic operability.

MTS SR 3.3.2.2 Surveillance Note provides details of performing a Channel Operational Test (COT) and is deleted. The requirement for verification that interlock P-6 is in the required state for existing unit conditions is unchanged and is appropriately summarized in the Bases.

If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate operability evaluations performed for the affected Function(s), which would evaluate potential operability impact on individual instrument Function channels and/or the coincident logic subsystem channel. Adverse impacts to operability could be evaluated to affect individual instrumentation channels, or may be evaluated to impact the divisional coincident logic. In either outcome, the appropriate actions are provided by the LCO Actions for affected supported feature(s).

Instrument Function channels with interlocks implicitly required to support the channel's operability, are also addressed by the COT and Channel Calibration Surveillance Requirements.

Actuation logic divisions with interlocks implicitly required to support the divisions operability is also addressed by the Actuation Logic Test Surveillance Requirements. The applicable COT, Channel Calibration, and Actuation Logic Test Bases will include the following discussion supporting this change ( CHANNEL CALIBRATION is replaced with COT or ACTUATION LOGIC TEST as appropriate):

Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. W hen an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.

DOC L11 deletes GTS/PTS Table 3.3.1-1, Function 5, Source Range Neutron Flux - High, requirements for 1 channel to be operable in Modes 3(e), 4(e), and 5(e) and the associated references to the required number of channels (Required Channels), applicable Actions (Condition), and applicable Surveillance Requirements; Footnote (e) (W ith RTBs open. In this condition, Source Range Function does not provide reactor trip but does provide indication.);

and GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Action R. The Source Range Neutron Flux indication Function in Modes 3,

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 22 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

4, and 5 with RTBs open, is not related to the Reactor Trip System, but involves indication only as stated in Footnote (e), and only requires one channel to be providing indication. The associated Bases also state that in Mode 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to be operable.

Therefore, the operability, applicability, action, and surveillance requirements for one Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel are inappropriately placed in the Reactor Trip System Specification.

GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Engineered Safeguards Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, requires 4 Source Range Neutron Flux channels to be Operable in Modes 3(n), 4(e), and 5(e),

(Footnote (n): Not applicable when critical or during intentional approach to criticality ;

Footnote (e): Not applicable for valve isolation Functions whose associated flow path is isolated ). This Applicability includes the specified Applicability of GTS/PTS LCO 3.3.1 for one operable Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, which is being omitted from AP1000 STS LCO 3.3.2. Furthermore, the SRs for the Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels also encompass the GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Channel Check and Channel Calibration Surveillances for a Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel, that are being omitted from STS Section 3.3.

GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Action R applies solely for inoperability of the one required Source Range Neutron Flux indication channel (i.e., the condition of all four Source Range Neutron Flux indication channels inoperable). In the unlikely event that all four channels were inoperable, the GTS/PTS 3.3.2 action requirements associated with the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function channels, are appropriate to provide the necessary protection. Changes to these Actions are addressed in changes to GTS/PTS 3.3.2, Table 3.3.2-1, Function 15a, Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling Function, and are reflected in the MTS 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation. The MTS 3.3.8 Actions direct entering applicable actions for inoperable valves associated with boron dilution flow paths, i.e., TS 3.1.9, Chemical and Volume Control System (CVS) Demineralized W ater Isolation Valves and Makeup Line Isolation Valves.

STS 3.1.9 Action B would apply to this condition (i.e., all required valves would be considered inoperable) and require isolation of the affected flow paths within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, consistent with GTS/PTS 3.3.1, Required Action R.2. The potential for an uncontrolled boron dilution accident is eliminated by isolating all unborated water sources as required by this action. This change eliminates GTS/PTS 3.3.1 Required Actions R.1 (suspend operations involving positive reactivity additions) and R.3 (perform Shutdown Margin verifications); however, with the RTBs open and potential boron dilution paths isolated, unit safety is adequately maintained without completing these other, currently specified, required actions.

This change is consistent with changes made in TSTF-135, 3.3 - RPS and ESFAS Instrumentation, Revision 3, and as reflected in NUREG-1431. Therefore, this change results in closer alignment with NUREG-1431 presentation of Source Range Neutron Flux indication instrumentation. The Actions of AP1000 STS 3.3.8 and 3.1.9 for the Condition of no operable channels of the Boron Dilution Block - Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling ESFAS Function continue to assure operation within the assumptions of the safety analysis. As such there is no adverse impact to public health and safety.

Reference 2 in the Bases is revised from APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC to APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification. OPT/ OTT reactor trips are addressed in STS 3.3.1.

Reference 2 in STS 3.3.2 is cited in reference to TS Completion Times and Surveillance Frequencies. Therefore, APP-GW-GSC-020 is the correct reference.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 23 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

The remaining changes, including those made by DOC A024, are editorial, clarifying, grammatical, or otherwise considered administrative. These changes do not affect the technical content, but improve the readability, implementation, and understanding of the requirements, and are therefore acceptable.

Having found that this GTSTs proposed changes to the GTS and Bases are acceptable, the NRC staff concludes that AP1000 STS Subsection 3.3.2 is an acceptable model Specification for the AP1000 standard reactor design.

References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs):

None

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 24 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

VIII. Review Information

Evaluator Comments:

None

Randy Belles Oak Ridge National Laboratory 865-574- 0388 bellesrj@ornl.gov

Review Information:

Availability for public review and comment on Revision 0 of this traveler approved by NRC staff on 5/29/2014.

APOG Comments (Ref. 8) and Resolutions:

1. (Internal # 3 and # 146) Throughout the Bases, references to Sections and Chapters of the FSAR do not include the FSAR clarifier. Since these Section and Chapter references are to an external document, it is appropriate (DOC A003) to include the FSAR modifier. This is resolved by adding the FSAR modifier as appropriate.
2. (Internal # 6) The GTST sections often repeat VEGP LAR DOCs, which reference existing and current requirements. The inclusion in the GTST of references to existing and current, are not always valid in the context of the GTS. Each occurrence of existing and current should be revised to be clear and specific to GTS, MTS, or VEGP COL TS (or other), as appropriate. Noted ambiguities are corrected in the GTST body.
3. (Internal # 7)Section VII, GTST Safety Evaluation, inconsistently completes the subsection References to Previous NRC Safety Evaluation Reports (SERs) by citing the associated SE for VEGP 3&4 COL Amendment 13. It is not clear whether there is a substantive intended difference when omitting the SE citation. This is resolved by removing the SE citation in Section VII of the GTST and ensuring that appropriate references to the consistent citation of this reference in Section X of the GTST are made.
4. (Internal #13) Many GTSTs evaluated TSTF-425 with the following note: Risk-informed TS changes will be considered at a later time for application to the AP1000 STS.

The NRC approval of TSTF -425, and model safety evaluation provided in the CLIIP for TSTF-425, are generically applicable to any designs Technical Specifications. As such, the replacement of certain Frequencies with a Surveillance Frequency Control Program should be included in the GTST for AP1000 STS NUREG.

However, implementation in the AP1000 STS should not reflect optional (i.e., bracketed) material showing retention of fixed Surveillance Frequencies where relocation to a Surveillance Frequency Control Program is acceptable. Since each represented AP1000 Utility is committed to maintaining standardization, there is no rationale for an AP1000 STS that includes bracketed options.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 25 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Consistent with TSTF-425 criteria, replace applicable Surveillance Frequencies with In accordance with the Surveillance Frequency control Program and add that Program as new AP1000 STS Specification 5.5.15.

NRC Staff disagreed with implementing TSTF-425 in the initial version of the STS.

Although the APOG thinks the analysis supporting this traveler is general enough to be applicable to AP1000, staff thinks an AP1000- specific proposal from APOG is needed to identify any GTS SRs that should be excluded. Also, with the adoption of a Surveillance Frequency Control Program (SFCP) in the AP1000 STS, bracketed Frequencies, which provide a choice between the GTS Frequency and the SFCP Frequency, are needed because the NRC will use the AP1000 STS as a reference, and to be consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev. 4. APOG was requested to consider proposing an AP1000 version of TSTF-425 for a subsequent revision of the STS.

5. (Internal # 116) In GTST for Subsection 3.3.2,Section VI, under the heading Rationale for changes in RCOL Std. Dep., RCOL COL Item(s), and RCOL PTS Changes, the f irst paragraph mentions DOC A028. This DOC is for changes to ESFAS TS and does not affect Subsection 3.3.2. Note that it is not mentioned anywhere else in this Subsection. This is also stated in Subsection 3.3.1 and Subsections 3.3.3 throug h 3.3.7. Change DOCs A024 and A028 to DOC A024 in GTST 3.3.1 through GTST 3.3.7. This is resolved by making the recommended change.
6. (Internal # 119) The modifier PMS f or power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases. NRC Staff notes that this comment also applies to STS Subsections 3.3.1, 3.3.3, 3.3.8, and 3.9.3. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits. NRC staff notes that the initial use of Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) in the Bases for an STS Subsection should be retained. In addition, NRC staff proposes to uniformly use
  • Power Range Neutron Flux,
  • Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and
  • Source Range Neutron Flux

in place of other phrases that refer to power, intermediate, and source range instrumentation channels or detectors. NRC staff further proposes to remove interlock af ter P-6 and P-10, except when used to refer to the interlock and not the setpoint-and to be consistent with TS wording.

In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh paragraphs as indicated:

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 26 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this react or trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.

The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. The This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.

Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.

The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P-6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and the Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.

Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS)

PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE.

Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the PMS source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.

In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident. If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the source range Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)

Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 27 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the PMS Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

In the Actions section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:

In the event a channels Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found condition trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading A.1 as indicated:

Condition A addresses the situation where one source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading B.1 and B.2 as indicated:

Condition B addresses the situation where two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-tw o, w hile still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation Completion Times provided in LCO 3.3.3.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading C.1 as indicated:

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 28 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Conditions Condition A or B is are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading D.1 as indicated:

Condition D addresses the situations where one or two source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or tw o source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore three of four source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading E.1 and E.2 as indicated:

Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D is are not met. If three of the four required source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are is reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

In the same section, revise the paragraph under the heading F.1 as indicated:

Condition F addresses the situation where three or more source range instrumentation Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.

In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, revise the first paragraph as indicated:

SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RT COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response...

In the same section, revise the third paragraph, first sentence as indicated:

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 29 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

A test subsystem is provided with the protection and safety monitoring system PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the RTCOT.

In the same section, revise the sixth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:

To the extent possible, protection and safety monitoring system PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features.

In the same section, revise the ninth paragraph, first sentence as indicated:

This The test frequency COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.

In the same section, revise the last two paragraphs as indicated for consistency with the Bases for SR 3.3.1.7 and SR 3.3.3.2 (see comment # 135):

The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux

- High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the plant unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and four 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is

< P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < below P-6 for more than 4 four hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the 4 four hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the NIS source range Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods > 4 of greater than four hours.

During the RTCOT, the protection and safety monitoring system PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.

In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, under the heading SR 3.3.2.3, revise the first three paragraphs as indicated, and move the last

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 30 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

two sentences of paragraph 1 to the beginning of paragraph 2 for consistency with the Bases for STS SR 3.3.1.8:

SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.

The test CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel setpoint channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the source range neutron Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.

7. (Internal # 126) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsections 3.3.1 through 3.3.7, revise the opening sentence to state:

The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the RTBs are closed

This provides additional clarity. This is resolved by making the recommended change.

8. (Internal # 135) The Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases under the heading SR 3.3.1.7, states that the Frequency is prior to startup. The TS SR 3.3.1.7 Frequency is actually prior to reactor startup. Change prior to startup to prior to reactor startup This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Bases discussion for SR 3.3.2.2 as shown in the resolution of comments for comment
  1. 119 above.
9. (Internal # 139) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases, correct the following typographical errors:
  • On page 5, first paragraph fourth line, change MTS 3.3.3 to MTS 3.3.2; and
  • On page 6, first paragraph on page, change (STS 3.3.3 Condition F) to (STS 3.3.2 Condition F)
  • On page 6, before the Changes to Condition table, change (MTS) 3.3.3 and as further changed, STS 3.3.3 to (MTS) 3.3.2 and as further changed, STS 3.3.2

This is resolved by making the recommended GTST changes.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 31 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

10. (Internal # 140) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases and in GTST Section VII under heading Technical Analysis, the discussion states the Required Action is changed to state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of SDM, consistent with TSTF-469-T. TSTF-469-T and the AP1000 STS markups state, Suspend positive reactivity additions that co uld result in a loss of requ ired SDM. Revise the discussions to add the word required to be co nsistent with the TS markups. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
11. (Internal # 141) In GTST Section V under the heading Changes to the Generic TS and Bases in the Changes to Condition table, in row with STS 3.3.2 Condition E, Condition co lumn lists two Condition Q items. The second one of these items identifies the STS 3.3.2 Condition as E and the Additional DOC Changes as M02. The DOC change should be L07 just like the previous Condition Q item. Change M02 to L07. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change.
12. (Internal # 142 and 143) In GTST Section VII under the heading GTST Safety Evaluation the sixth paragraph states, Based on the DOC L01 changes, an RTCOT is not required by the TS. Therefore, the Section 1.1 RTCOT definition is deleted. The def inition of RTCOT is deleted for a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Replace sentences with Current section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted per TSU LAR DOC M01. This is resolved by making the recommended GTST change (consistent with comment # 117):

The GTS/PTS Section 1.1 definition of RTCOT is deleted f or a series of reasons as described in DOC M01. Changes made by DOC M01 result in consistency with the use of Actuation Logic Test and COT in other TS requirements, are consistent with the intent of the required TS testing, and are consistent with NUREG-1431, Rev.4.

13. (Internal # 144) In the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2, the penultimate paragraph, discusses other LCOs where the source range detectors are addressed. LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Saf ety Feature Actuation System (ESF AS) Actuation Logic - Operating, should be identified since Source Range Monitors are required by LCO 3.3.8 in MODE 2, 3, and 4. Add LCO 3.3.15 into the listing. In addition, the modifier PMS for power range detectors, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux, and Source Range, Neutron Flux, is unnecessary. Inclusion of PMS in the Bases is inconsistent with other PMS instruments, with the LCO requirement nomenclature, and the general AP1000 DCD presentation. Delete PMS as a modifier to power range, Intermediate Range, and Source Range, throughout the Bases (see comment # 119).

This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the ASA, LCO, and Applicability section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.

14. (Internal # 145) In the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases for STS Subsection 3.3.2 under the heading SR 3.3.2.2, the third paragraph, first sentence repeats a Note (i.e., provides a new description of the note), which is already described in the previous paragraph. Delete the first sentence of this paragraph. This is resolved by making the recommended change with additional edits including the Surveillance Requirements section of the Bases as shown in the resolution of comments for comment # 119 above.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 32 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

NRC Final Approval Date: 6/29/ 2015

NRC

Contact:

C. Craig Harbuck United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission 301-415-3140 Craig.Harbuck@nrc.gov

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 33 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

IX. Evaluator Comments for Consideration in Finalizing Technical Specifications and Bases

None

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 34 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

X. References Used in GTST

1. AP1000 DCD, Revision 19, Section 16, Technical Specifications, June 2011 (ML11171A500).
2. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Technical Specifications Upgrade License Amendment Request, February 24, 2011 (ML12065A057).
3. NRC Safety Evaluation (SE) for Amendment No. 13 to Combined License (COL) No.

NPF-91 for Vogtle Electric Generating Plant (VEGP) Unit 3, and Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 for VEGP Unit 4, September 9, 2013, ADAMS Package Accession No.

ML13238A337, which contains:

ML13238A355 Cover Letter - Issuance of License Amendment No. 13 for Vogtle Units 3 and 4 (LAR 12- 002).

ML13238A359 Enclosure 1 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-91 ML13239A256 Enclosure 2 - Amendment No. 13 to COL No. NPF-92 ML13239A284 Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13)

ML13239A287 Enclosure 4 - Safety Evaluation (SE), and Attachment 1 - Acronyms ML13239A288 SE Attachment 2 - Table A - Administrative Changes ML13239A319 SE Attachment 3 - Table M - More Restrictive Changes ML13239A333 SE Attachment 4 - Table R - Relocated Specifications ML13239A331 SE Attachment 5 - Table D - Detail Removed Changes ML13239A316 SE Attachment 6 - Table L - Less Restrictive Changes

The following documents were subsequently issued to correct an administrative error in Enclosure 3:

ML13277A616 Letter - Correction To The Attachment (Replacement Pages) - Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4-Issuance of Amendment Re:

Technical Specifications Upgrade (LAR 12- 002) (TAC No. RP9402)

ML13277A637 Enclosure 3 - Revised plant-specific TS pages (Attachment to Amendment No. 13) (corrected)

4. TSTF-286, Revision 2, Define Operations Involving Positive Reactivity Additions.
5. TSTF-GG-05-01, W riter's Guide for Plant-Specific Improved Technical Specifications, June 2005.
6. RAI Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request (LAR) 12- 002 for the Vogtle Electric Generating Plant Units 3 and 4 Combined Licenses, September 7, 2012 (ML12251A355).
7. Southern Nuclear Operating Company, Vogtle Electric Generating Plant, Units 3 and 4, Response to Request for Additional Information Letter No. 01 Related to License Amendment Request LAR 002, ND 2015, October 04, 2012 (ML12286A363 and ML12286A360)

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 35 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

8. APOG-2014- 008, APOG (AP1000 Utilities) Comments on AP1000 Standardized Technical Specifications (STS) Generic Technical Specification Travelers (GTSTs), Docket ID NRC-2014- 0147, September 22, 2014 (ML14265A493).

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 36 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

XI. MARKUP of the Applicable GTS Subsection for Preparation of the STS NUREG

The entire section of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST is presented next.

Changes to the Specifications and Bases are denoted as follows: Deleted portions are marked in strikethrough red font, and inserted portions in bold blue f ont.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 37 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

3.3 INSTRUMENTATION

3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

LCO 3.3.2 Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Reactor Trip breakers (RTBs) closed and Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.

ACTIONS

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

A. One channel A. 1 Place inoperable channel 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> inoperable in MODE 2. in bypass or trip.

B. Tw o channels B.1 Place one inoperable 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> inoperable in MODE 2. channel in bypass.

AN D

B.2 Place one inoperable 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> channel in trip.

CA. Required Action and CA.1 Suspend operations Immediately associated Completion involving positive reactivity Time of Condition A or additions that could result B not met One or two in a loss of required SDM.

Source Range Neutron Flux channels inoperable.

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-1 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 38 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

DC. One or two channels DC.1 Restore three of four 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> inoperable in MODE 3, channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5. status.

OR

C. 2 Open RTBs. 49 hours5.671296e-4 days <br />0.0136 hours <br />8.101852e-5 weeks <br />1.86445e-5 months <br />

D. Required Source D.1 Suspend operations Prior to increasing Range Neutron Flux involving positive reactivity THERMAL POW ER channel inoperable. additions. to > P-6

AND

D.2 Close unborated water 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> source isolation valves.

AND

D.3 Perform SR 3.1.1.1. 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />

AND

Once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter

E. Required Action and E.1 Initiate action to fully 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> associated Completion insert all rods.

Time of Condition D not met. AN D

E.2 Place the Plant Control 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-2 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 39 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

FB. Three or more Source FB.1 Open reactor trip breakers Immediately Range Neutron Flux (RTBs).

channels inoperable.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY

SR 3.3.2.1 Perform CHANNEL CHECK. 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

SR 3.3.2.2 -------------------------------NOTES------------------------------- -------NOTE -------

1. This Surveillance shall include verification that Only required interlock P-6 is in its required state for existing when not unit conditions. performed within previous 92 days
1. Only required to be performed when not ----------------------

performed within previous 92 days.

2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after entry into MODE 3.

Perform RTCOT in accordance with Setpoint Program. Prior to reactor startup

AND

4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6

AND

92 days thereafter

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-3 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 40 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY

SR 3.3.2.3 --------------------------------NOTE------------------- -------------

Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with 24 months Setpoint Program.

SR 3.3.2.4 --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------

Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.

Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits. 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-4 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 41 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION

B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

BASES

BACKGROUND A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.

APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all SAFETY AOOs and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which ANALYSES, LCO, the RTBs are closed.

and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)

Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and the this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.

The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint.

This reactor The trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor source range trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5. Therefore,

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-1 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 42 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.

The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P -6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with RTBs closed and t he Plant Control Rod Drive System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted RTBs open, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux - High channels for reactor trip Functions to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High trip and the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.

In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted,

the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.

If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux source range detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron flux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS)

Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic -

Shutdown. The requirements f or the Source Range Neutron Flux PMS source range detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-2 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 43 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

ACTIONS In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel channels as-found trip setting condition is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.

A. 1

Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. With one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.

B.1 and B.2

Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2. With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-3 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 44 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

ACTIONS (continued)

Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.

C.1

Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Ac t i on C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.

D.1

Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. With one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.

E.1 and E.2

Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, and Required Ac t i on E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-4 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 45 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

ACTIONS (continued)

F.1

Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. With three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.

A.1

Condition A applies to one or two Source Range Neutron Flux trip channels inoperable when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the PMS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions.

With one or two of the four channels inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation.

With only two source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced and any actions that add positive reactivity to the core must be suspended immediately.

B.1

Condition B applies to three inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels when in MODE 2, below the P-6 setpoint, and performing a reactor startup, or in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the CRD System capable of rod withdrawal. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith three source range channels inoperable, the RTBs must be opened immediately. W ith the RTBs open, the core is in a more stable condition.

C.1 and C.2

Condition C applies to one or two inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux channels in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs closed and the PLS capable of rod withdrawal. W ith the unit in this Condition, below P-6, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith one or two of the source range channels inoperable, 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> is allowed to restore three of the four channels to an OPERABLE status. If the channels cannot be returned to an OPERABLE status, 1 additional hour is allowed to open the RTBs. Once the RTBs are open, the core is in a

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-5 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 46 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

ACTIONS (continued)

more stable condition and the unit enters Condition R. The allowance of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore the channel to OPERABLE status, and the additional hour to open the RTBs, are justified in Reference 2.

D.1, D.2, and D.3

Condition D applies when the required Source Range Neutron Flux channel is inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the RTBs open. W ith the unit in this Condition, the NIS source range performs the monitoring and protection functions. W ith the required source range channel inoperable, operations involving positive reactivity additions shall be suspended immediately. This will preclude any power escalation. In addition to suspension of positive reactivity additions, all valves that could add unborated water to the RCS must be closed within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> as specified in LCO 3.9.2. The isolation of unborated water sources will preclude a boron dilution accident.

Also, the SDM must be verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter as per SR 3.1.1.1, SDM verification. With no source range channels OPERABLE, core protection is severely reduced. Verifying the SDM within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> allows sufficient time to perform the calculations and determine that the SDM requirements are met. The SDM must also be verified once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter to ensure that the core reactivity has not changed. Required Action D.3 precludes any positive reactivity additions; therefore, core reactivity should not be increasing, and a 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Frequency is adequate. The Completion Times of within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> are based on operating experience in performing the Required Actions and the knowledge that unit conditions will change slowly.

SURVEILLANCE The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and RTCOT are performed in a manner REQUIREMENTS that is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate F S AR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-6 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 47 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.

SR 3.3.2.1

Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.

The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.

SR 3.3.2.2

SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a RTCOT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-7 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 48 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

A RTCOT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.

A test subsystem is provided with the PMS protection and safety monitoring system to aid the plant staff in performing the RT COT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features. Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.

For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.

Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.

To the extent possible, PMS protection and safety monitoring system functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The RTCOT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.

If the RTCOT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the RTCOT can be performed using portable test equipment.

Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed w hen required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-8 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 49 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.

The COT Surveillance Frequency This test frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT )

and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.

SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note states that this test shall include verification that the P-6 interlock is in its required state for the existing unit condition. allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after entry into MODE 3.

The Frequency is modified by a Note that allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within 92 days of the Frequencies prior to reactor startup and four hours after reducing power below P-6. The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of every 92 days thereafter applies if the unit plant remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and f our 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below < P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than four 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, then the testing required by this surveillance must be

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-9 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 50 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

performed prior to the expiration of the four 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure This test ensures that the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function NIS source range instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four > 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

During the RTCOT, the PMS protection and safety monitoring system cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.

SR 3.3.2.3

A SR 3.3.2.3 is the performance of a CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual setting of the channel is found to be outside the as found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channels response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux source range neutron detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-10 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 51 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.

The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.

SR 3.3.2.4

This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.

For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FS AR DCD Chapter 7 response time.

Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-11 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 52 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.

Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.

Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.

REFERENCES 1. FS AR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.

2. APP-GW-GLR-137, Revision 1, Bases of Digital Overpower and Overtemperature Delta-T (OPT/ OTT) Reactor Trips, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
2. AP P-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-12 Amendment 0Rev. 0 Revision 19 Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 53 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

XII. Applicable STS Subsection After Incorporation of this GTSTs Modifications

The entire subsection of the Specifications and the Bases associated with this GTST, following incorporation of the modifications, is presented next.

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 54 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

3.3 INSTRUMENTATION

3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

LCO 3.3.2 Four channels of RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High Setpoint instrumentation shall be OPERABLE.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 2 with Intermediate Range Neutron Flux below the P-6 interlock, MODES 3, 4, and 5 with Plant Control System capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted.

ACTIONS

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

A. One channel inoperable A.1 Place inoperable channel in 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> in MODE 2. bypass or trip.

B. Two channels B.1 Place one inoperable 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> inoperable in MODE 2. channel in bypass.

AND

B.2 Place one inoperable 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> channel in trip.

C. Required Action and C.1 Suspend positive reactivity Immediately associated Completion additions that could result in Time of Condition A or B a loss of required SDM.

not met.

D. One or two channels D.1 Restore three of four 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> inoperable in MODE 3, channels to OPERABLE 4, or 5. status.

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-1 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 55 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME

E. Required Action and E.1 Initiate action to fully insert 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> associated Completion all rods.

Time of Condition D not met. AND

E.2 Place the Plant Control 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> System in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal.

F. Three or more channels F.1 Open reactor trip breakers Immediately inoperable. (RTBs).

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY

SR 3.3.2.1 Perform CHANNEL CHECK. 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-2 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 56 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation 3.3.2

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY

SR 3.3.2.2 -------------------------------NOTES-------------------------------

1. Only required to be performed when not performed within previous 92 days.
2. Not required to be performed prior to entering MODE 3 from MODE 2 until 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after entry into MODE 3.

Perform COT in accordance with Setpoint Program. Prior to reactor startup

AND

4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6

AND

92 days thereafter

SR 3.3.2.3 --------------------------------NOTE--------------------------------

Neutron detectors are excluded from CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION in accordance with 24 months Setpoint Program.

SR 3.3.2.4 --------------------------------NOTE--------------- -----------------

Neutron detectors are excluded from response time testing.

Verify RTS RESPONSE TIME is within limits. 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS

AP1000 STS 3.3.2-3 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 57 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

B 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION

B 3.3.2 Reactor Trip System (RTS) Source Range Instrumentation

BASES

BACKGROUND A description of the RTS Instrumentation is provided in the Bases for LCO 3.3.1, Reactor Trip System (RTS) Instrumentation.

APPLICABLE The RTS functions to maintain compliance with the SLs during all AOOs SAFETY and mitigates the consequences of DBAs in all MODES in which the ANALYSES, LCO, RTBs are closed.

and APPLICABILITY The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provides protection against an uncontrolled bank rod withdrawal accident from a subcritical condition during startup. This reactor trip Function provides redundant protection to the Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint and Intermediate Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Functions. In MODES 3, 4, and 5, administrative controls also prevent the uncontrolled withdrawal of rods. The Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS)

Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are located external to the reactor vessel and measure neutrons leaking from the core. The safety analyses do not take credit for the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function. Even though the safety analyses take no credit for this reactor trip Function, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available and this reactor trip Function is implicitly assumed in the safety analyses.

The Trip Setpoint reflects only steady state instrument uncertainties as the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors do not provide primary protection for any events that result in a harsh environment. This reactor trip Function can be manually blocked by the main control room operator when above the P-6 setpoint (Intermediate Range Neutron Flux interlock) and is automatically unblocked when below the P-6 setpoint. The manual block of the Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function also de-energizes the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors. The Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are automatically re-energized when below the P-6 setpoint. This reactor trip Function is automatically blocked when above the P-10 setpoint (Power Range Neutron Flux interlock). The Source Range Neutron Flux reactor trip Function is the only RTS automatic protective Function required in MODES 3, 4, and 5.

Therefore, the functional capability at the specified Trip Setpoint is assumed to be available.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-1 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 58 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES, LCO, and APPLICABILITY (continued)

The LCO requires four channels of the Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE in MODE 2 below P -6 and in MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the Plant Control System (PLS) capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods not fully inserted. Four channels are provided to permit one channel to be in trip or bypass indefinitely and still ensure no single random failure will disable this reactor trip Function. In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the PLS incapable of rod withdrawal and all rods fully inserted, the LCO does not require the Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function to be OPERABLE.

In MODE 2 when below the P-6 setpoint during a reactor startup, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint reactor trip Functions will provide core protection for reactivity accidents. Above the P-6 setpoint, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are de-energized and inoperable as described above.

In MODE 3, 4, or 5 with the reactor shutdown, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must also be OPERABLE. If the PLS is capable of rod withdrawal or one or more rods are not fully inserted, the Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function must be OPERABLE to provide core protection against a rod withdrawal accident.

If the PLS is not capable of rod withdrawal, the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors are required to be OPERABLE to provide monitoring of neutron f lux levels and provide protection for events like an inadvertent boron dilution. These Functions are addressed in LCO 3.3.8, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation, Function 17, Source Range Neutron Flux Doubling, LCO 3.3.15, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Instrumentation Actuation Logic - Operating, and LCO 3.3.16, Engineered Safety Feature Actuation System (ESFAS) Actuation Logic - Shutdown. The requirements for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors in MODE 6 are addressed in LCO 3.9.3, Nuclear Instrumentation.

The RTS Source Range Neutron Flux instrumentation satisfies Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-2 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 59 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

ACTIONS In the event a Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel as-found trip setting is outside the as-found tolerance described in the SP, or the channel is not functioning as required, or the transmitter, instrument loop, signal processing electronics, or trip output is found inoperable, then all affected Functions provided by that channel must be declared inoperable and the LCO Condition(s) entered for the protection Function(s) affected.

A.1

Condition A addresses the situation where one Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel is inoperable in MODE 2. W ith one channel inoperable, the inoperable channel must be placed in a bypass or trip condition within two hours. If one channel is bypassed, the logic becomes two-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function.) If one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-three, while still meeting the single failure criterion. (A failure in one of the three remaining channels will not prevent the protective function). The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.

B.1 and B.2

Condition B addresses the situation where two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 2.

With two channels inoperable, one affected channel must be placed in a bypass condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> and one affected channel must be placed in a trip condition within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />. If one channel is bypassed and one channel is tripped, the logic becomes one-out-of-two, while still meeting the single failure criterion. The 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> allowed to place the inoperable channel(s) in the bypassed or tripped condition is consistent with the Required Action Completion Times for an inoperable channel of the Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function provided in LCO 3.3.3.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-3 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 60 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

ACTIONS (continued)

C.1

Condition C is entered when any Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition A or B are not met. If the inoperable Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channel(s) is not restored to OPERABLE status or placed in trip or bypass, as applicable, within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action C.1 requires immediate suspension of positive reactivity additions that could result in a loss of required SDM.

D.1

Condition D addresses the situation where one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable in MODE 3, 4, or 5. W ith one or two Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels inoperable, three of the four required channels must be restored to OPERABLE status within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br />. The Completion Time of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> to restore three of four Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels to OPERABLE status is justified in Reference 2.

E.1 and E.2

Condition E is entered when the Required Action and associated Completion Time of Condition D are not met. If three of the four required Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are not restored to OPERABLE status within the allowed Completion Time, Required Action E.1 requires that action be initiated to fully insert all rods within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, and Required Action E.2 requires that the PLS be placed in a condition incapable of rod withdrawal within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the specified condition in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

F.1

Condition F addresses the situation where three or more Source Range Neutron Flux - High reactor trip Function channels are inoperable. W ith three or more channels inoperable, the single failure criterion cannot be met and the reactor trip breakers must be opened immediately.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-4 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 61 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE The CHANNEL CALIBRATION and COT are performed in a manner that REQUIREMENTS is consistent with the assumptions used in analytically calculating the required channel accuracies. For channels that include dynamic transfer functions, such as, lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, the response time test may be performed with the transfer function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time (Ref. 1). Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.

SR 3.3.2.1

Performance of the CHANNEL CHECK once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> ensures that gross failure of instrumentation has not occurred. A CHANNEL CHECK is normally a comparison of the parameter indicated on one channel to a similar parameter on other channels. It is based on the assumption that instrument channels monitoring the same parameter should read approximately the same value. Significant deviations between the two instrument channels could be an indication of excessive instrument drift in one of the channels or of even something more serious. A CHANNEL CHECK will detect gross channel failure; thus, it is key to verifying that the instrumentation continues to operate properly between each CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

Agreement criteria are determined by the plant staff based on a combination of the channel instrument uncertainties, including indication and readability. If a channel is outside the criteria, it may be an indication that the sensor or the signal processing equipment have drifted outside their corresponding limits.

The Frequency is based on operating experience that demonstrates that channel failure is rare. Automated operator aids may be used to facilitate the performance of the CHANNEL CHECK.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-5 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 62 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SR 3.3.2.2

SR 3.3.2.2 is the performance of a COT. The test is performed in accordance with the SP. If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as -left tolerance),

and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

A COT is performed on each required channel to provide reasonable assurance that the entire channel will perform the intended Function.

A test subsystem is provided with the PMS to aid the plant staff in performing the COT. The test subsystem is designed to allow for complete functional testing by using a combination of system self checking features, functional testing features, and other testing features.

Successful functional testing consists of verifying that the capability of the system to perform the safety function has not failed or degraded.

For hardware functions this would involve verifying that the hardware components and connections have not failed or degraded. Generally this verification includes a comparison of the outputs from two or more redundant subsystems or channels.

Since software does not degrade, software functional testing involves verifying that the software code has not changed and that the software code is executing.

To the extent possible, PMS functional testing is accomplished with continuous system self-checking features and the continuous functional testing features. The COT shall include a review of the operation of the test subsystem to verify the completeness and adequacy of the results.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-6 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 63 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

If the COT cannot be completed using the built-in test subsystem, either because of failures in the test subsystem or failures in redundant channel hardware used for functional testing, the COT can be perf ormed using portable test equipment.

Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this COT. This portion of the COT ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP. If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations perf ormed f or the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function.

When an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.

The COT Surveillance Frequency of 92 days is justified based on Reference 2 (which refers to this test as RTCOT ) and the use of continuous diagnostic test features, such as deadman timers, cross-check of redundant channels, memory checks, numeric coprocessor checks, and tests of timers, counters and crystal time bases, which will report a failure within the PMS cabinets to the operator within 10 minutes of a detectable failure.

SR 3.3.2.2 is modified by two Notes. The first Note allows this surveillance to be satisfied if it has been performed within the previous 92 days. The second Note provides a 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> delay in the requirement to perform this Surveillance when entering MODE 3 from MODE 2. This note allows a normal shutdown to proceed without a delay for testing in MODE 2 and for a short time in MODE 3 until the RTBs are open and SR 3.3.2.2 is no longer required to be performed. If the unit is to be in MODE 3 with the RTBs closed for a time greater than 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, this Surveillance must be performed prior to 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after entry into MODE 3.

The Frequency of prior to reactor startup ensures this surveillance is performed prior to critical operations, and applies to the Source Range Neutron Flux - High, Intermediate Range Neutron Flux - High (SR 3.3.3.2), and Power Range Neutron Flux - Low Setpoint (SR 3.3.1.7) reactor trip Function instrument channels. The Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6 allows a normal shutdown to be completed

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-7 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 64 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

and the unit removed from the MODE of Applicability for this surveillance without a delay to perform the testing required by this surveillance. The Frequency of 92 days thereafter applies if the unit remains in the MODE of Applicability after the initial performances of prior to reactor startup and 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> after reducing power below P-6. The MODE of Applicability for this surveillance is below P-6. Once the unit is in MODE 3, this surveillance is no longer required. If power is to be maintained < P-6 for more than f our hours, then the testing required by this surveillance must be performed prior to the expiration of the f our hour limit. Four hours is a reasonable time to complete the required testing or place the unit in a MODE where this surveillance is no longer required. The Surveillance Frequencies for this COT ensure that the Source Range Neutron Flux -

High reactor trip Function instrumentation channels are OPERABLE prior to taking the reactor critical and after reducing power into the applicable MODE (< P-6) for periods of greater than four hours.

During the COT, the PMS cabinets in the division under test may be placed in bypass.

SR 3.3.2.3

A CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed every 24 months or approximately at every refueling. This SR is modified by a Note stating that neutron detectors are excluded from the CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION is performed in accordance with the SP.

If the actual trip setting of the channel is found to be outside the as-found tolerance, the channel is considered inoperable. This condition of the channel will be further evaluated during performance of the SR. This evaluation will consist of resetting the channel Trip Setpoint to the NTS (within the allowed as-left tolerance), and evaluating the channel response. If the channel is functioning as required and is expected to pass the next surveillance, then the channel is OPERABLE and can be restored to service at the completion of the surveillance. After the surveillance is completed, the channel as-found condition will be entered into the Corrective Action Program for further evaluation.

The CHANNEL CALIBRATION for the Source Range Neutron Flux detectors consists of obtaining the preamp discriminator curves, evaluating those curves, and comparing the curves to the manufacturers data.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-8 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 65 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

Interlocks implicitly required to support the Function's OPERABILITY are also addressed by this CHANNEL CALIBRATION. This portion of the CHANNEL CALIBRATION ensures the associated Function is not bypassed when required to be enabled. This can be accomplished by ensuring the interlocks are calibrated properly in accordance with the SP.

If the interlock is not automatically functioning as designed, the condition is entered into the Corrective Action Program and appropriate OPERABILITY evaluations performed for the affected Function. The affected Functions OPERABILITY can be met if the interlock is manually enforced to properly enable the affected Function. W hen an interlock is not supporting the associated Functions OPERABILITY at the existing plant conditions, the affected Function's channels must be declared inoperable and appropriate ACTIONS taken.

The 24 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for an unplanned transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the Surveillance when performed on the 24 month Frequency.

SR 3.3.2.4

This SR 3.3.2.4 verifies that the individual channel actuation response times are less than or equal to the maximum values assumed in the accident analysis. Response Time testing criteria are included in Reference 1.

For channels that include dynamic transfer Functions (e.g., lag, lead/lag, rate/lag, etc.), the response time test may be performed with the transfer Function set to one, with the resulting measured response time compared to the appropriate FSAR Chapter 7 response time.

Alternately, the response time test can be performed with the time constants set to their nominal value, provided the required response time is analytically calculated assuming the time constants are set at their nominal values. The response time may be measured by a series of overlapping tests such that the entire response time is measured.

Response time may be verified by actual response time tests in any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, or by the summation of allocated sensor, signal processing and actuation logic

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-9 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 66 GTST AP1000- O55-3.3.2, Rev. 1

RTS Source Range Instrumentation B 3.3.2

BASES

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

response times with actual response time tests on the remainder of the channel.

Each channel response must be verified every 24 months on a STAGGERED TEST BASIS (i.e., all four Protection Channel Sets would be tested after 96 months). Response times cannot be determined during plant operation because equipment operation is required to measure response times. Experience has shown that these components usually pass this surveillance when performed on a refueling frequency.

Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

SR 3.3.2.4 is modified by a note exempting neutron detectors from RTS RESPONSE TIME testing. This Note is necessary because of the difficulty in generating an appropriate detector input signal. Excluding the detectors is acceptable because the principles of detector operation ensure a virtually instantaneous response.

REFERENCES 1. FSAR Chapter 7.0, Instrumentation and Controls.

2. APP-GW-GSC-020, Technical Specification Completion Time and Surveillance Frequency Justification.

AP1000 STS B 3.3.2-10 Rev. 0

Date report generated:

Monday, June 29, 2015 Page 67